Epson BrightLink Pro 1430Wi User`s guide

BrightLink® Pro 1420Wi/1430Wi
User's Guide
Contents
BrightLink Pro 1420Wi/1430Wi User's Guide .......................................................................................... 13
Introduction to Your Projector .................................................................................................................
Projector Features..............................................................................................................................
Product Box Contents....................................................................................................................
Additional Components ................................................................................................................
Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts.................................................................................
Warranty and Registration Information ..........................................................................................
Notations Used in the Documentation ................................................................................................
Where to Go for Additional Information ..............................................................................................
Projector Part Locations .....................................................................................................................
Projector Parts - Front/Top ............................................................................................................
Projector Parts - Side.....................................................................................................................
Projector Parts - Interface Panel....................................................................................................
Projector Parts - Base....................................................................................................................
Projector Parts - Control Panel ......................................................................................................
Projector Parts - Interactive Pens and Pen Tray............................................................................
Projector Parts - Remote Control...................................................................................................
Projector Parts - Touch Unit ..........................................................................................................
Projector Parts - Control Pad.........................................................................................................
14
14
16
17
18
19
20
20
21
21
22
23
25
26
27
29
31
33
Setting Up the Projector ...........................................................................................................................
Projector Placement...........................................................................................................................
Projector Setup and Installation Options .......................................................................................
Projection Distance........................................................................................................................
Removing and Attaching the Cable Cover..........................................................................................
Adjusting the Angle of the Touch Unit ................................................................................................
Installing the Projector Feet................................................................................................................
Projector Connections........................................................................................................................
Connecting to Computer Sources..................................................................................................
Connecting to a Computer for USB Video and Audio................................................................
Connecting to a Computer for VGA Video.................................................................................
35
35
35
36
39
39
59
60
61
61
62
3
Connecting to a Computer for HDMI Video and Audio .............................................................. 63
Connecting to a Computer for Pen Use or USB Mouse Control ................................................ 64
Connecting to a Computer for Sound........................................................................................ 65
Connecting a Computer to the Control Pad............................................................................... 65
Connecting to Video Sources ........................................................................................................ 67
Connecting to an HDMI Video Source ...................................................................................... 67
Connecting to an MHL-Compatible Device ............................................................................... 68
Connecting to a Component-to-VGA Video Source .................................................................. 68
Connecting to a Composite Video Source ................................................................................ 69
Connecting to a Video Source for Sound .................................................................................. 70
Connecting to an External Computer Monitor................................................................................ 70
Connecting to External Speakers .................................................................................................. 71
Connecting to External USB Devices ............................................................................................ 72
USB Device Projection.............................................................................................................. 72
Connecting a USB Device or Camera to the Projector.............................................................. 73
Connecting a USB Device to the Control Pad or Projector........................................................ 74
Selecting the Connected USB Source ...................................................................................... 74
Disconnecting a USB Device From the Control Pad or Projector .............................................. 74
Connecting a Printer to the Control Pad ........................................................................................ 75
Supported Printer Types ........................................................................................................... 76
Connecting to a Document Camera .............................................................................................. 76
Connecting Multiple Projectors of the Same Model ....................................................................... 77
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control .......................................................................................... 78
Installing Batteries in the Pens ........................................................................................................... 79
Installing Batteries in the Control Pad................................................................................................. 80
Using the Projector on a Network ............................................................................................................
Wired Network Projection...................................................................................................................
Connecting to a Wired Network .....................................................................................................
Selecting Wired Network Settings .................................................................................................
Restricted IP Addresses ...........................................................................................................
Wireless Network Projection ..............................................................................................................
Installing the Wireless LAN Module ...............................................................................................
Using Quick Wireless Connection (Windows Only) .......................................................................
4
83
83
84
84
87
88
89
91
Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually.............................................................................. 92
Wireless LAN Menu Settings .................................................................................................... 94
Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Windows.......................................................................... 96
Selecting Wireless Network Settings in OS X ................................................................................ 97
Enabling WPA or EAP Security ..................................................................................................... 97
Wireless Security Menu Settings .............................................................................................. 98
Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts ...................................................................................... 100
Network Projector E-mail Alert Messages ................................................................................... 102
Setting Up Monitoring Using SNMP ................................................................................................. 102
Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser ................................................................ 103
Creating an Address Book ............................................................................................................... 105
Adding Templates from a Web Browser ........................................................................................... 106
Crestron RoomView Support............................................................................................................ 107
Setting Up Crestron RoomView Support ..................................................................................... 108
Controlling a Networked Projector Using Crestron RoomView .................................................... 109
Using Basic Projector Features .............................................................................................................
Turning On the Projector ..................................................................................................................
Turning Off the Projector ..................................................................................................................
Selecting the Language for the Projector Menus..............................................................................
Setting the Date and Time................................................................................................................
Image Shape....................................................................................................................................
Correcting Image Shape with the Keystone Buttons....................................................................
Correcting Image Shape with Quick Corner ................................................................................
Resizing the Image with the Wide and Tele Buttons ........................................................................
Adjusting the Image Position ............................................................................................................
Focusing the Image..........................................................................................................................
Remote Control Operation ...............................................................................................................
Using the Remote Control as a Wireless Mouse .........................................................................
Using the Remote Control as a Pointer........................................................................................
Selecting an Image Source ..............................................................................................................
Projection Modes .............................................................................................................................
Changing the Projection Mode Using the Remote Control ..........................................................
Changing the Projection Mode Using the Menus.........................................................................
5
111
111
113
114
115
117
117
120
121
122
123
124
126
127
127
128
129
130
Image Aspect Ratio ..........................................................................................................................
Changing the Image Aspect Ratio ...............................................................................................
Available Image Aspect Ratios ....................................................................................................
Color Mode.......................................................................................................................................
Changing the Color Mode............................................................................................................
Available Color Modes.................................................................................................................
Turning On Auto Iris.....................................................................................................................
Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons..............................................................................
Projecting a PC Free Presentation ...................................................................................................
Supported PC Free File Types ....................................................................................................
Starting a PC Free Slide Show ....................................................................................................
Starting a PC Free Movie Presentation .......................................................................................
Starting a PC Free PDF File Presentation ...................................................................................
Slideshow Display Options ..........................................................................................................
130
131
131
132
132
133
134
135
135
136
137
139
140
142
Adjusting Projector Features .................................................................................................................
Shutting Off the Picture and Sound Temporarily ..............................................................................
Stopping Video Action Temporarily ..................................................................................................
Zooming Into and Out of Images ......................................................................................................
Scheduling Projector Events ............................................................................................................
Saving a Scheduled Event...........................................................................................................
Viewing Scheduled Events ..........................................................................................................
Editing Scheduled Events............................................................................................................
Projector Security Features..............................................................................................................
Password Security Types ............................................................................................................
Setting a Password .................................................................................................................
Selecting Password Security Types........................................................................................
Entering a Password to Use the Projector...............................................................................
Saving a User's Logo Image to Display...................................................................................
Locking the Projector's Buttons ...................................................................................................
Unlocking the Projector's Buttons ...........................................................................................
Installing a Security Cable ...........................................................................................................
Creating a User Pattern to Display ...................................................................................................
144
144
145
145
146
147
147
148
150
150
151
152
153
154
156
157
157
158
6
Using the Interactive Features ............................................................................................................... 159
Interactive Modes............................................................................................................................. 159
Using the Interactive Pens ............................................................................................................... 160
Using the Pens ............................................................................................................................ 160
Pen Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 163
Calibrating Automatically ........................................................................................................ 164
Calibrating Manually ............................................................................................................... 166
Using Finger Touch Interactivity ...................................................................................................... 169
Touch Unit Safety Instructions..................................................................................................... 169
Calibrating for Finger Touch Interactivity ..................................................................................... 171
Using Finger Touch Operations................................................................................................... 175
Using BrightLink With a Computer ................................................................................................... 177
PC Interactive Mode System Requirements ................................................................................ 177
Switching to PC Interactive Mode................................................................................................ 178
Controlling Computer Features from a Projected Screen (PC Interactive Mode)......................... 179
Adjusting the Pen Operation Area ............................................................................................... 181
Easy Interactive Tools ................................................................................................................. 183
Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools ............................................................................................... 184
Enabling Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools ............................................................................ 184
Using Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools................................................................................. 186
Whiteboard Mode............................................................................................................................. 187
Using the Whiteboard Toolbars ................................................................................................... 188
The Main Whiteboard Toolbar ..................................................................................................... 189
Selecting Background Templates................................................................................................ 191
Zooming Images in Whiteboard Mode......................................................................................... 192
Inserting and Working With Images ............................................................................................. 192
Using the Shapes Tool ................................................................................................................ 193
Selecting Line Width and Color ................................................................................................... 194
The Bottom Whiteboard Toolbar.................................................................................................. 194
Selecting Whiteboard Settings .................................................................................................... 196
Selecting Basic Whiteboard Settings and Policies .................................................................. 196
Selecting Whiteboard Print Settings........................................................................................ 199
Selecting Settings for Saving Whiteboard Pages.................................................................... 201
7
Selecting Settings for Emailing Whiteboard Pages ................................................................. 203
Inserting a Document or Image From a Scanner ......................................................................... 205
Selecting a Networked Device Source ........................................................................................ 206
Saving Pages in Whiteboard Mode ............................................................................................. 208
Working With Thumbnail Pages .................................................................................................. 209
Printing in Whiteboard Mode ....................................................................................................... 210
Emailing Your Whiteboard Pages................................................................................................ 212
Sharing the Whiteboard............................................................................................................... 213
Starting a Shared Whiteboard Session ................................................................................... 214
Connecting to a Shared Whiteboard from a Computer or Other Device.................................. 216
Supported Web Browsers for Sharing a Whiteboard............................................................... 216
Web Browser Toolbars ........................................................................................................... 217
Connecting to a Shared Whiteboard from a Projector............................................................. 219
Annotation Mode (PC Free) ............................................................................................................. 220
Drawing on a Projected Image (Annotation Mode) ...................................................................... 220
Using the Annotation Toolbars .................................................................................................... 222
The Main Annotation Toolbar ...................................................................................................... 224
Zooming Images in Annotation Mode .......................................................................................... 226
The Bottom Annotation Toolbar................................................................................................... 226
Printing in Annotation Mode......................................................................................................... 227
Saving Images in Annotation Mode ............................................................................................. 228
Splitting the Screen .......................................................................................................................... 228
Adjusting the Menu Settings ..................................................................................................................
Using the Projector's Menus.............................................................................................................
Image Quality Settings - Image Menu ..............................................................................................
Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu..................................................................................................
Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu......................................................................................
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu.......................................................................................
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu.....................................................................................
Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu ..............................................................................................
Projector Information Display - Info Menu ........................................................................................
Event ID Code List.......................................................................................................................
Projector Reset Options - Reset Menu .............................................................................................
8
231
231
234
236
239
242
250
252
254
255
257
Maintaining and Transporting the Projector .........................................................................................
Projector Maintenance .....................................................................................................................
Cleaning the Projection Window..................................................................................................
Cleaning the Obstacle Sensor .....................................................................................................
Cleaning the Projector Case........................................................................................................
Air Filter and Vent Maintenance ..................................................................................................
Cleaning the Air Filter and Vents.............................................................................................
Replacing the Air Filter............................................................................................................
Projector Lamp Maintenance.......................................................................................................
Replacing the Lamp ................................................................................................................
Resetting the Lamp Timer.......................................................................................................
Replacing the Remote Control Batteries .....................................................................................
Replacing the Interactive Pen Batteries.......................................................................................
Replacing the Interactive Pen Tips ..............................................................................................
Transporting the Projector................................................................................................................
258
258
258
259
260
260
260
263
266
267
271
272
273
275
276
Solving Problems .................................................................................................................................... 277
Projection Problem Tips ................................................................................................................... 277
Projector Light Status ....................................................................................................................... 278
Using the Projector Help Displays .................................................................................................... 280
Solving Image or Sound Problems ................................................................................................... 281
Solutions When No Image Appears............................................................................................. 281
Solutions When Image is Incorrect Using the USB Display Function .......................................... 282
Solutions When "No Signal" Message Appears........................................................................... 283
Displaying From a PC Laptop ................................................................................................. 283
Displaying From a Mac Laptop ............................................................................................... 284
Solutions When "Not Supported" Message Appears ................................................................... 284
Solutions When Only a Partial Image Appears ............................................................................ 284
Solutions When the Image is Not Rectangular ............................................................................ 285
Solutions When the Image Contains Noise or Static ................................................................... 285
Solutions When the Image is Fuzzy or Blurry .............................................................................. 286
Solutions When the Image Brightness or Colors are Incorrect .................................................... 287
Solutions to Sound Problems ...................................................................................................... 287
Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems ............................................................... 288
9
Solutions to Projector Power or Shut-Off Problems ..................................................................... 288
Solutions to Problems with the Remote Control........................................................................... 289
Solutions to Password Problems ................................................................................................. 290
Solutions When the Source Cannot Be Changed ........................................................................ 290
Solving Interactive Problems............................................................................................................ 290
Solutions When "Error Occurred in the Easy Interactive Function" Message Appears................ 291
Solutions When the Interactive Pens Do Not Work...................................................................... 291
Solutions When the Interactive Pen Position Is Not Accurate...................................................... 292
Solutions When Manual Calibration Does Not Work.................................................................... 293
Solutions When the Interactive Pens Are Slow or Difficult to Use................................................ 293
Solutions When the Interactive Pens Cause Interference or Unwanted Effects .......................... 293
Solutions When Finger Touch Interactivity Does Not Work ......................................................... 294
Solutions for Problems With Capturing, Printing, Saving, or Scanning ........................................ 294
Solutions When Inking Does Not Appear in Microsoft Office ....................................................... 295
Solutions When the Pen Does Not Work Over a Network or the Toolbars Do Not Appear ......... 296
Solutions When the Time Is Incorrect in Whiteboard Settings ..................................................... 296
Solving Network Problems ............................................................................................................... 296
Solutions When Wireless Authentication Fails ............................................................................ 296
Solutions When You Cannot Access the Projector Through the Web ......................................... 297
Solutions When Network Alert E-Mails are Not Received............................................................ 297
Where to Get Help............................................................................................................................ 297
Technical Specifications ........................................................................................................................
General Projector Specifications ......................................................................................................
Projector Lamp Specifications..........................................................................................................
Remote Control Specifications .........................................................................................................
Interactive Pen Specifications ..........................................................................................................
Touch Unit Specifications ................................................................................................................
Projector Dimension Specifications..................................................................................................
Projector Electrical Specifications ....................................................................................................
Projector Environmental Specifications............................................................................................
Projector Safety and Approvals Specifications.................................................................................
Supported Video Display Formats....................................................................................................
USB Display System Requirements .................................................................................................
10
299
299
300
301
301
301
302
302
303
303
303
306
Notices .....................................................................................................................................................
Recycling..........................................................................................................................................
Important Safety Information ............................................................................................................
Important Safety Instructions............................................................................................................
Restriction of Use ........................................................................................................................
FCC Compliance Statement.............................................................................................................
Wireless Telegraphy Act Regulations...............................................................................................
Trademarks ......................................................................................................................................
Open Source Software License........................................................................................................
Copyright Notice...............................................................................................................................
A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials...................................................
Copyright Attribution ....................................................................................................................
11
308
308
308
309
312
312
313
313
313
365
365
365
BrightLink Pro 1420Wi/1430Wi User's Guide
Welcome to the BrightLink Pro 1420Wi/1430Wi User's Guide.
13
Introduction to Your Projector
Refer to these sections to learn more about your projector and this manual.
Projector Features
Notations Used in the Documentation
Where to Go for Additional Information
Projector Part Locations
Projector Features
The BrightLink Pro 1420Wi/1430Wi projectors include these special features:
Unique interactive functions
• Annotation with or without a computer
• Annotation with two pens at the same time
• Enhanced Easy Interactive toolbar for Windows and Mac
• Touch-based interactivity for as many as six users (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi)
• Share your whiteboard with up to 15 other devices, including tablets, smartphones, and other
projectors with whiteboard sharing capabilities
• Annotate projected content from your device
• Scan and display content from a connected scanner
• Email, save, or print your content without a computer
• Import content from a USB drive
Ultra short throw projection system
• Project an 87-inch (221-cm) image (WXGA) from just 9.1 inches (231 mm) away
• Easily mounted on a wall (with the wall mount) or table (with the optional table projection mount) for
fast, low-cost installations
• Can be mounted vertically to create an interactive workspace directly on a table surface
• Reduced shadow interference and glare
Bright, high-resolution images
• Up to 3300 lumens of color brightness (color light output) and 3300 lumens of white brightness (white
light output)
14
Note: Color brightness (color light output) and white brightness (white light output) will vary depending
on usage conditions. Color light output measured in accordance with IDMS 15.4; white light output
measured in accordance with ISO 21118.
• Native resolution of 1280 × 800 pixels (WXGA)
Flexible connectivity
• HDMI 1/MHL and HDMI 2 ports for computer or video device connection
• Plug-and-play 3-in-1 USB projection, audio, and mouse control for instant setup
• Wired network support for projection
• Projector monitoring and control via remote network computer
• Optional wireless network support, including video and audio transfer
• PC Free photo slide shows via connected USB memory devices or Epson document camera
• Dual VGA ports for connections by multiple presenters
• Port for connecting an external monitor
• Projection from iOS or Android devices with the wireless LAN module and free Epson iProjection app;
visit epson.com/projectorapp (U.S.) or epson.ca/projectorapp (Canada) for more information
Innovative display and operation features
• Low total cost of ownership with long-life projector lamp and high-efficiency air filter
• High digital zoom ratio for larger images in shorter projection distances
• 10000:1 contrast ratio and Auto Iris control for sharp, detailed images
• Built-in closed captioning decoder
• Powerful 16 W speaker system with audio out port for connecting external speakers
• Epson's Instant Off and Direct Power On features for quick setup and shut down
• Support for Crestron RoomView network monitoring systems
• Network message broadcast system to project timely messages to all networked projectors
Product Box Contents
Additional Components
Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts
Warranty and Registration Information
Parent topic: Introduction to Your Projector
15
Product Box Contents
Save all the packaging in case you need to ship the projector. Always use the original packaging (or
equivalent) when shipping.
Make sure your projector box included all of these parts:
1
Projector
2
Remote control
3
Remote control batteries (two AA alkaline)
16
4
Pens and batteries (one AA alkaline battery for each pen)
5
Rubber feet (BrightLink Pro 1420Wi)
6
Pen tray
7
USB cables (3)
8
Power cord
9
Touch Unit connection cable (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi)
10
Password Protected sticker
11
Projector manuals and software links CD
12
Projector software for Easy Interactive Function CD
13
Touch Unit and markers (inside the unit) (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi)
14
Labels (4) (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi)
15
Tape for securing markers (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi)
16
Infrared deflectors (8) (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi)
17
Wireless LAN unit
18
Control Pad (with batteries)
Parent topic: Projector Features
Additional Components
Depending on how you plan to use the projector, you may need to obtain the following additional
components:
• To receive a composite video signal, you need an RCA-style video or A/V cable. See your local
computer or electronics dealer for purchase information.
• To receive a component video signal, you need a D-sub, 15-pin, component-to-VGA video cable. You
can purchase one from Epson or an authorized Epson reseller.
• To receive an HDMI signal, you need a compatible HDMI cable. You can purchase one from Epson or
an authorized Epson reseller.
Note: To connect a Mac that includes only a Mini DisplayPort, Thunderbolt port, or Mini-DVI port for
video output, you need to obtain an adapter that allows you to connect to the projector's HDMI port.
17
Contact Apple for compatible adapter options. Older Mac computers (2009 and earlier) may not
support audio through the HDMI port.
• To receive an HDMI signal via MHL, you need an MHL-compatible device, an MHL cable or an HDMI
cable and an MHL adapter compatible with your device. Devices with an integrated MHL connector
may not require a cable.
• To sync additional BrightLink Pro projectors together, you will need a stereo mini cable or the remote
control cable set (ELPKC28).
• To power the Control Pad from the projector, you will need the remote control cable set (ELPKC28).
• To project with audio from certain ports, you may need a commercially available audio cable
compatible with your device. See your local computer or electronics dealer for purchase information.
• If you did not purchase a mount that included a VGA cable, you may need a VGA computer cable. You
can purchase one from Epson or an authorized Epson reseller.
Parent topic: Projector Features
Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts
You can purchase screens, other optional accessories, and replacement parts from an Epson authorized
reseller. To find the nearest reseller, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766). Or you can purchase online
at epsonstore.com (U.S. sales) or epson.ca (Canadian sales).
Epson offers the following optional accessories and replacement parts for your projector:
Option or part
Part number
Genuine Epson replacement lamp (ELPLP80)
V13H010L80
Replacement air filter (ELPAF40)
V13H134A40
Quick wireless connection USB key (ELPAP09)
V12H005M09
Promethean ActivInspire software
V12HPSW001
SMART Notebook software
V12HSSW020
Mimio MimioStudio Software for BrightLink Projectors
V12HMSS020
Wall mount (ELPMB43)
V12H675020
Table projection mount (ELPMB29)
V12H516020
Epson DC-06 document camera (ELPDC06)
V12H321005
Epson DC-11 document camera (ELPDC11)
V12H377020
18
Option or part
Part number
Epson DC-12 document camera (ELPDC12)
V12H594020
Epson DC-20 document camera (ELPDC20)
V12H500020
PowerLite Pilot 2 (ELPCB02)
V12H614020
Active speakers (ELPSP02)
V12H467020
Additional interactive pen A (ELPN04A) (orange)
V12H666010
Additional interactive pen B (ELPN04B) (blue)
V12H667010
Replacement set of 6 pen tips (ELPPS02)
V12H668010
Interactive Pen Extension (ELPPE01)
V12H590001
USB extension cable
V12H525001
Remote control cable set (ELPKC28)
V12H005C28
On Wall Cable Management Kit
ELPCK01
Kensington security lock
ELPSL01
Touch Unit attachment mount (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi)
ELPPT05
90-inch whiteboard
V12H468002
96-inch whiteboard
V12H468001
6 ft. (1.8 m) VGA computer cable
F3H982-06
10 ft. (3.0 m) VGA computer cable
F3H982-10
10 ft. (3.0 m) Component-to-VGA video cable
ELPKC19
In addition to the accessories listed above, 1-year and 2-year extended service plans are available.
Parent topic: Projector Features
Warranty and Registration Information
Your projector comes with a basic warranty that lets you project with confidence. For details, see the
warranty that came with your projector.
In addition, Epson offers free Extra Care Road Service. In the unlikely event of an equipment failure, you
won’t have to wait for your unit to be repaired. Instead, Epson will ship you a replacement unit anywhere
in the United States, Canada, or Puerto Rico. See the Extra Care Road Service brochure for details.
19
Register your product online using the projector CD or at this site: epson.com/webreg.
Registering also lets you receive special updates on new accessories, products, and services.
Parent topic: Projector Features
Notations Used in the Documentation
Follow the guidelines in these notations as you read your documentation:
• Warnings must be followed carefully to avoid bodily injury.
• Cautions must be observed to avoid damage to your equipment.
• Notes contain important information about your projector.
• Tips contain additional projection information.
Parent topic: Introduction to Your Projector
Where to Go for Additional Information
Need quick help on using your projector? Here's where to look for help:
• Built-in help system
Press the Help button on the remote control or projector to get quick solutions to common problems.
• Help icon on the bottom whiteboard toolbar
Select the help icon to get a quick summary of the tools and features available.
• epson.com/support (U.S) or epson.ca/support (Canada)
View FAQs (frequently asked questions) and e-mail your questions to Epson technical support 24
hours a day.
• For detailed instructions on using your projector in a network environment, see the EasyMP Network
Projection Operation Guide.
• For detailed instructions on monitoring your projector in a network environment (Windows only), see
the EasyMP Monitor Operation Guide.
• For detailed instructions on using your projector to hold interactive meetings in a network environment,
see the EasyMP Multi PC Projection Operation Guide.
• If you still need help after checking this manual and the sources listed above, you can use the Epson
PrivateLine Support service to get help fast. For details, see "Where to Get Help".
Parent topic: Introduction to Your Projector
20
Projector Part Locations
Check the projector part illustrations to learn about the parts on your projector.
Projector Parts - Front/Top
Projector Parts - Side
Projector Parts - Interface Panel
Projector Parts - Base
Projector Parts - Control Panel
Projector Parts - Interactive Pens and Pen Tray
Projector Parts - Remote Control
Projector Parts - Touch Unit
Projector Parts - Control Pad
Parent topic: Introduction to Your Projector
Projector Parts - Front/Top
1
Remote control receiver
2
Speaker
3
Control panel
4
Cable cover screws
5
Cable cover
21
6
Exhaust vent
7
Lamp cover screw
8
Lamp cover
Parent topic: Projector Part Locations
Projector Parts - Side
1
Filter cover switch
2
Security cable installation slot
3
Wireless LAN light
4
Interactive pen receiver
22
5
Obstacle sensor
6
Remote receiver
7
Projection window
8
Security lock port
9
Air filter cover
10
Air intake vent (air filter)
11
Focus lever
Parent topic: Projector Part Locations
Projector Parts - Interface Panel
1
Wireless LAN module port
2
Audio port
3
Computer port
4
Audio Out port
5
USB-B port
23
6
Monitor Out port
7
Network (LAN) port
8
HDMI 2 port
9
HDMI 1/MHL port
10
Audio port
11
RS-232C port
12
SYNC In/Out ports
13
Power inlet
14
TCH port for the Touch Unit connection cable (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi)
15
USB-A port
16
USB-A port (for document camera)
17
Video port
18
Audio port
19
Remote port (for optional connection to the Control Pad)
Parent topic: Projector Part Locations
Related references
Projector Light Status
24
Projector Parts - Base
1
Ceiling mount holes (5)
2
Security cable attachment point
3
Rear foot attachment points (2) (BrightLink Pro 1420Wi)
4
Wall mount plate holes (4)
5
Illumination sensor
6
Front foot attachment point (BrightLink Pro 1420Wi)
Parent topic: Projector Part Locations
25
Related tasks
Installing the Projector Feet
Projector Parts - Control Panel
1
Projector status lights
2
Source Search button (searches for connected video sources)
3
Enter button (selects options)
4
Horizontal/Vertical keystone adjustment buttons (display the adjustment screen and adjust screen
shape) and arrow buttons
5
Help button (accesses projector help information)
6
Esc button (cancels/exits functions)
7
Wide/Tele buttons (adjust projected image size), horizontal keystone adjustment buttons (adjust
screen shape), and arrow buttons
8
Menu button (accesses projector menu system)
9
Power button
Parent topic: Projector Part Locations
26
Projector Parts - Interactive Pens and Pen Tray
1
Pen tip
2
Battery light
3
Power/function button
4
Attachment for optional strap or cord
5
Battery cover
27
1
Installation magnets
2
Mounting holes
3
Security lock hole
Parent topic: Projector Part Locations
28
Projector Parts - Remote Control
29
1
Power button
2
Capture button (captures the annotation screen and pastes it as a new whiteboard page)
3
Print button (prints the projected screen)
4
Numeric buttons (enter numbers)
5
Auto button (automatically adjusts position, tracking, and sync settings)
6
Aspect button (selects the image aspect ratio)
7
Num button (when held down, switches numeric buttons to number function)
8
Menu button (accesses projector menu system)
9
Arrow buttons (move through on-screen options and control wireless mouse functions)
10
Enter button (selects options and controls wireless mouse functions)
11
User button (customizable for different functions)
12
Page up/down buttons (control presentation slides)
13
E-Zoom +/– buttons (zoom into and out of the image)
14
A/V Mute button (turns off picture and sound)
15
Split button (toggles split screen mode)
16
Strap attachment point
17
Help button (accesses projector help information)
18
Freeze button (stops video action)
19
Volume up/down buttons (adjust speaker volume)
20
Pointer button (activates on-screen pointer)
21
Esc button (cancels/exits functions and controls wireless mouse functions)
21
Pen Mode button (cycles between PC Interactive and PC Free Annotation modes)
23
Color Mode button (selects display modes)
24
MHL Menu button (displays settings or performs functions for the MHL device)
25
Whiteboard button (turns the projector on (if necessary) and displays Whiteboard mode)
26
Save button (saves the displayed image to a USB drive or network folder)
27
Source Search button (searches for connected sources)
30
Parent topic: Projector Part Locations
Projector Parts - Touch Unit
The Touch Unit comes with the BrightLink Pro 1430Wi projector only.
Front (Cover On)
Front (Cover Off)
1
Dial cover
2
TCH port
3
Security slot
4
Adjustment dials
5
Power light
31
Rear
1
Laser diffusion ports
2
Installation magnets
3
Guide markers (used for performing angle adjustment)
Parent topic: Projector Part Locations
32
Projector Parts - Control Pad
1
Power button
2
Whiteboard button (switches to whiteboard mode)
3
Source Search button (searches for connected sources)
4
Capture button (captures projected image in annotation mode)
5
Print button (prints the projected image)
6
Save button (saves the projected image)
7
USB-B port for connecting a computer (on bottom of control pad)
8
USB-A port for connecting a USB thumbdrive or other storage device (under bottom cover)
9
Printer USB-A port for connecting a printer (under top cover)
10
USB-B port for connecting to the projector for printing or thumbdrive access (under top cover)
11
USB-A port for connecting to the projector for interactive functions (under top cover)
12
Remote port for connecting the optional remote control cable (under top cover)
33
13
Light emitting areas (output remote control signals)
14
Bottom cover (open to connect a USB thumbdrive or other storage device)
15
Top cover (open to connect cables or replace batteries)
16
Cable cover (open when cables are wired along a wall)
Parent topic: Projector Part Locations
34
Setting Up the Projector
Follow the instructions in these sections to set up your projector for use.
Projector Placement
Removing and Attaching the Cable Cover
Adjusting the Angle of the Touch Unit
Installing the Projector Feet
Projector Connections
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control
Installing Batteries in the Pens
Installing Batteries in the Control Pad
Projector Placement
Your ultra-short throw projector is designed to be installed on a wall (with a wall mount) or vertically on a
table (with a table mount) to create an interactive tabletop workspace.
Keep these considerations in mind as you select a projector location:
• Follow the instructions in the Installation Guide provided with your mounting hardware to install the
projector using the included mounting equipment.
• Leave plenty of space around and under the projector for ventilation, and do not place it on top of or
next to anything that could block the vents.
• Position the projector within reach of a grounded electrical outlet or extension cord.
• If installing vertically on a desk or table, the table projection mount (V12H516020) is required.
• If installing on a wall, the wall mount (V12H675020) is required.
Projector Setup and Installation Options
Projection Distance
Parent topic: Setting Up the Projector
Projector Setup and Installation Options
You can set up or install your projector in the following ways:
35
Mounted on the wall or ceiling
Mounted vertically on a table to create an interactive workspace
Wherever you set up the projector, make sure to position it squarely in front of the screen, not at an
angle.
Parent topic: Projector Placement
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Projection Distance
The distance at which you place the projector from the screen determines the approximate size of the
image. The image size increases the farther the projector is from the screen, but can vary depending on
the zoom factor, aspect ratio, and other settings.
Use the tables here to determine approximately how far to place the projector from the screen based on
the size of the projected image. (Conversion figures may have been rounded up or down.) For more
detailed information and installation instructions, see the Installation Guide provided with your wall
36
mount. You can also use the projector Throw Distance Calculator at epson.com/support (U.S.) or
epson.ca/support (Canada).
Note: All minimum ceiling heights are based on an image 30 inches (76 cm) from the floor.
16:10 Aspect Ratio
Diagonal
image
size
Min. ceiling
height
Image
width
60 inches
78.7 inches
(199.8 cm)
70 inches
Min. projection
distance
Distance from top
of image to wall
plate holes
50.9
31.8 inches
inches
(80.8 cm)
(129.2 cm)
2.5 inches
(6.2 cm)
6.9 inches (17.4 cm)
85.0 inches
(215.9 cm)
59.4
37.1 inches
inches
(94.2 cm)
(150.8 cm)
4.9 inches
(12.4 cm)
7.9 inches (20.1 cm)
80 inches
91.4 inches
(232.0 cm)
67.8
42.4 inches
inches
(107.7 cm)
(172.3 cm)
7.3 inches
(18.7 cm)
9.0 inches (22.7 cm)
88 inches
96.4 inches
(245.0 cm)
74.6
46.6 inches
inches
(118.5 cm)
(189.5 cm)
9.3 inches
(23.6 cm)
9.8 inches (24.9 cm)
90 inches
97.7 inches
(248.2 cm)
76.3
47.7 inches
inches
(121.2 cm)
(193.9 cm)
9.8 inches
(24.9 cm)
10.0 inches
(25.4 cm)
84.8
53.0 inches
inches
(134.6 cm)
(215.4 cm)
12.2 inches
(31.1 cm)
11.1 inches
(28.1 cm)
100 inches 104.1 inches
(264.3 cm)
Image height
16:9 Aspect Ratio
Diagonal
image
size
Min. ceiling
height
Image width
Image height
Min. projection
distance
Distance from top
of image to wall
plate holes
59 inches
77.5 inches
(196.8 cm)
51.5 inches
(130.6 cm)
28.9 inches
(73.5 cm)
2.6 inches
(6.6 cm)
8.5 inches (21.7 cm)
37
Diagonal
image
size
Min. ceiling
height
Image width
Image height
Min. projection
distance
Distance from top
of image to wall
plate holes
60 inches
78.1 inches
(198.3 cm)
52.3 inches
(132.8 cm)
29.4 inches
(74.7 cm)
2.9 inches
(7.3 cm)
8.7 inches (22.0 cm)
70 inches
84.3 inches
(214.2 cm)
61.0 inches
(155.0 cm)
34.3 inches
(87.2 cm)
5.4 inches
(13.7 cm)
10.0 inches
(25.4 cm)
77 inches
88.7 inches
(225.3 cm)
67.1 inches
(170.5 cm)
37.8 inches
(95.9 cm)
7.1 inches
(18.1 cm)
11.0 inches
(27.8 cm)
80 inches
90.6 inches
(230.1 cm)
69.7 inches
(177.1 cm)
39.2 inches
(99.6 cm)
7.9 inches
(20.0 cm)
11.4 inches
(28.9 cm)
90 inches
96.8 inches
(246.0 cm)
78.4 inches
(199.2 cm)
44.1 inches
(112.1 cm)
10.4 inches
(26.4 cm)
12.7 inches
(32.3 cm)
97 inches
101.2 inches
(257.1 cm)
84.5 inches
(214.7 cm)
47.6 inches
(120.8 cm)
12.2 inches
(30.9 cm)
13.7 inches
(34.7 cm)
4:3 Aspect Ratio
Diagonal
image
size
Min. ceiling
height
Image width
Image height
Min. projection
distance
Distance from top
of image to wall
plate holes
53 inches
78.7 inches
(199.8 cm)
42.4 inches
(107.7 cm)
31.8 inches
(80.8 cm)
2.5 inches
(6.2 cm)
6.9 inches (17.4 cm)
60 inches
83.7 inches
(212.5 cm)
48 inches
(121.9 cm)
36 inches
(91.4 cm)
4.4 inches
(11.2 cm)
7.7 inches (19.5 cm)
70 inches
90.9 inches
(230.8 cm)
56.0 inches
(142.2 cm)
42 inches
(106.7 cm)
7.2 inches
(18.2 cm)
8.9 inches (22.5 cm)
77 inches
95.9 inches
(243.6 cm)
61.6 inches
(156.5 cm)
46.2 inches
(117.3 cm)
9.1 inches
(23.1 cm)
9.7 inches (24.7 cm)
80 inches
98.1 inches
(249.1 cm)
64 inches
(162.6 cm)
48 inches
(121.9 cm)
9.9 inches
(25.2 cm)
10.1 inches
(25.6 cm)
88 inches
103.8 inches
(263.7 cm)
70.4 inches
(182.9 cm)
52.8 inches
(134.1 cm)
12.1 inches
(30.8 cm)
11.0 inches
(28.0 cm)
38
Parent topic: Projector Placement
Removing and Attaching the Cable Cover
Before you can connect equipment to your projector, you need to remove the cable cover.
1. Remove both of the cable cover screws (screwdriver not included).
2. Slide off the cable cover.
To attach the cable cover, slide it into position and tighten the screws.
Parent topic: Setting Up the Projector
Adjusting the Angle of the Touch Unit
You can adjust the angle of the Touch Unit to detect the position of your fingers.
39
Note: These instructions require that the Touch Unit is mounted and connected according to the
Installation Guide provided with your projector or projector mount.
1. Turn the projector on.
2. Loosen the screw at the bottom of the Touch Unit.
3. Remove the dial cover from the Touch Unit.
40
4. Remove the markers from inside the Touch Unit.
5. Press the Menu button on the remote control or projector control panel.
6. Select Easy Interactive Function from the Extended menu.
41
7. Select Touch Unit Setup.
8. Make sure Power is set to On.
42
The Touch Unit power turns on and the indicator light turns blue.
Warning: Do not look into the projector's projection window or the Touch Unit's laser diffusion ports
(located on the back of the Touch Unit); this could cause injury to eyesight.
9. Select Angle Adjustment.
The Angle Adjustment screen is displayed.
43
10. Turn the adjustment dials on the Touch Unit counterclockwise until you hear a click. Press the
button on the remote control.
Note: Make sure to stop turning the dials when you hear the click.
11. Attach the two markers you removed from the Touch Unit to the marker positions shown on the
projected screen (
)(
).
44
12. Match the positions so that the crosses (A) overlap with the points (B) on the marker positions (
)(
). Move the marker over the projected cross until the lines of the cross align with the lines on the
marker.
13. When pointers (
)(
) with the same color (blue and green) as the marker positions are
displayed on the left and right of the projection surface, attach the markers to the projection surface
as follows:
• For magnetic screens: Place the bottom of the markers on the screen.
45
• For non-magnetic screens: Use the supplied tape to secure the markets. Attach the tape so that
each end of the marker is secure on the screen.
Correct position:
Incorrect position:
Note: Do not place anything other than the markers near the projected image during angle
adjustment. If other objects are on the projected image, angle adjustment may not be performed
correctly.
46
14. Turn the adjustment dials on the Touch Unit to move the pointers so that they move inside of the
target of the same color (blue and green) on either side.
Turning an adjustment dial clockwise moves the pointer diagonally up towards the center of the
projected image.
47
Turning an adjustment dial counterclockwise moves the pointer diagonally down away from the
center of the projected image.
When the pointers are inside the target, the colors become solid (
)(
)
Note: If a dial makes a clicking sounds, the pointer will not move any further. When turning the dials,
make sure the shadows from your arm or body do not cover the markers.
15. When the pointers on the left and right become solid colors, press the
control.
48
button on the remote
The next adjustment screen is displayed.
49
16. Place the markers at the top marker positions [1]. When angle adjustment is performed correctly, the
upper pointers become solid colors. If the upper pointers do not become solid colors, start again
from step 9.
50
17. Place the markers at the bottom marker positions [2]. When angle adjustment is performed correctly,
the bottom pointers become solid colors. If the bottom pointers do not become solid colors, start
again from step 9.
18. When you have finished checking the marker positions, remove the markets and press the
on the remote control.
51
button
The following confirmation screen is displayed:
52
19. Trace the dots with your finger as shown. When angle adjustment is performed correctly, the traced
dots disappear.
Note: Finger touch operations may not function correctly if you are wearing bandages, artificial nails,
nail polish, or anything else that may obstruct your fingers.
20. When all of the dots have disappeared, press the press the
to the next step.
If any dots remain (as shown below), do the following:
button on the remote control and go
• Remove any obstacles from around the projected screen. When you are finished, press the up or
down arrow button on the remote control and repeat step 19.
• If the dots still remain after removing obstacles, turn the adjustment dials about a quarter turn
counterclockwise. Press the up or down arrow button on the remote control and repeat step 19.
53
• If the dots still remain or there are obstacles that cannot be removed, such as whiteboard trays or
frames, go to step 21.
54
21. If there is an obstacle that cannot be removed such as a whiteboard tray or frame, remove the tape
from the back of the supplied infrared deflectors and stick them to the screen so that the laser is not
reflected by the obstacle.
Make sure to stick the deflectors between the dots and the obstacle and adjust the number of
deflectors according to the number of dots.
Note: Do not remove an infrared deflector once is has been stuck in place. Do not stick tape or place
anything on the infrared deflectors. The deflectors will not function properly if anything is placed on
them.
22. After placing the infrared deflectors, press the up or down arrow button on the remote control and
repeat step 19.
If the dots do not disappear even after attaching the infrared deflectors, turn the adjustment dials
about a quarter turn counterclockwise. Press the up or down arrow button on the remote control and
repeat step 19.
Note: If the dots do not disappear even after performing the above procedure, contact Epson
support.
55
23. Perform touch calibration by pressing the Menu button on the remote control. On the Extended
menu, select Easy Interactive Function, then select Touch Unit Setup. Select Touch Calibration
and follow the instructions.
56
24. After you have finished touch calibration, store the markers inside the Touch Unit.
57
25. Attach the supplied labels to the tabs on either side of the Touch Unit. Match the center of the labels
with the tabs on the Touch Unit.
If the Touch Unit moves out of position, use the position of the labels to determine where to
reposition the Touch Unit.
58
26. Attach the dial cover. Make sure to tighten the screw at the bottom of the cover.
Parent topic: Setting Up the Projector
Related references
Touch Unit Safety Instructions
Related tasks
Calibrating for Finger Touch Interactivity
Using Finger Touch Operations
Installing the Projector Feet
To use the projector on a table or cart, you first need to install the feet (BrightLink Pro 1420Wi). You can
then use the feet to adjust the image position.
1. Turn the projector upside down.
59
2. Insert the larger front foot into the hole at the front of the projector.
1
Front foot (larger)
2
Rear feet
3. Insert the two smaller rear feet into the holes at the back of the projector.
Parent topic: Setting Up the Projector
Projector Connections
You can connect the projector to a variety of computer, video, and audio sources to display
presentations, movies, or other images, with or without sound.
• Connect any type of computer that has a USB port, standard video output (monitor) port, or HDMI port.
• For video projection, connect devices such as DVD players, gaming consoles, digital cameras, and
smartphones with compatible video output ports.
• If your presentation or video includes sound, you can connect audio input cables, if necessary.
• For slide shows without a computer, you can connect USB devices (such as a flash drive or camera)
or an optional Epson document camera.
Caution: If you will use the projector at altitudes above 4921 feet (1500 m), turn on High Altitude Mode
to ensure the projector's internal temperature is regulated properly.
60
Connecting to Computer Sources
Connecting to Video Sources
Connecting to an External Computer Monitor
Connecting to External Speakers
Connecting to External USB Devices
Connecting a Printer to the Control Pad
Connecting to a Document Camera
Connecting Multiple Projectors of the Same Model
Parent topic: Setting Up the Projector
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Connecting to Computer Sources
Follow the instructions in these sections to connect a computer to the projector.
Connecting to a Computer for USB Video and Audio
Connecting to a Computer for VGA Video
Connecting to a Computer for HDMI Video and Audio
Connecting to a Computer for Pen Use or USB Mouse Control
Connecting to a Computer for Sound
Connecting a Computer to the Control Pad
Parent topic: Projector Connections
Connecting to a Computer for USB Video and Audio
If your computer meets the system requirements, you can send video and audio output to the projector
through the computer's USB port (preferably USB 2.0). Connect the projector to your computer using a
USB cable.
You can also connect your computer to the control pad.
Note: This also lets you use the interactive pens with your computer. You need to change the USB Type
B setting in the projector's Extended menu before you can project through the USB port. Note that using
USB Display will slow interactive pen function. For the best performance, VGA or HDMI connections are
recommended.
Note: You can connect your computer's USB cable to the control pad instead of directly to the projector.
61
1. Turn on your computer.
2. Connect the cable to your projector's USB-B port.
3. Connect the other end to any available USB port on your computer.
4. To use USB Display, do one of the following:
• Windows 8.x: Click EPSON_PJ_UD in the upper right-corner, then select Run EMP_UDSE.exe
in the dialog box that appears to install the Epson USB Display software.
• Windows 7/Windows Vista: Select Run EMP_UDSE.exe in the dialog box that appears to install
the Epson USB Display software.
• Windows XP: Wait as messages appear on your computer screen and the projector installs the
Epson USB Display software on your computer.
• Windows 2000: Select Computer, EPSON_PJ_UD, and EMP_UDSE.EXE to install the Eposn
USB Display software.
• OS X: The USB Display setup folder appears on your screen. Select USB Display Installer and
follow the on-screen instructions to install the Epson USB Display software.
Follow any on-screen instructions. You need to install this software only the first time you connect
the projector to the computer.
The projector displays the image from your computer's desktop and outputs sound, if your presentation
contains audio.
Parent topic: Connecting to Computer Sources
Connecting to a Computer for VGA Video
You can connect the projector to your computer using a VGA computer cable.
62
Note: To connect a Mac that includes only a Mini DisplayPort, Thunderbolt port, or Mini-DVI port for
video output, you need to obtain an adapter that allows you to connect to the projector's VGA video port.
Contact Apple for compatible adapter options.
1. If necessary, disconnect your computer's monitor cable.
2. Connect the VGA computer cable to your computer's monitor port.
3. Connect the other end to a Computer port on the projector.
4. Tighten the screws on the VGA connector.
Parent topic: Connecting to Computer Sources
Connecting to a Computer for HDMI Video and Audio
If your computer has an HDMI port, you can connect it to the projector using an optional HDMI cable.
Note: To connect a Mac that includes only a Mini DisplayPort, Thunderbolt port, or Mini-DVI port for
video output, you need to obtain an adapter that allows you to connect to the projector's HDMI port.
Contact Apple for compatible adapter options. Older Mac computers (2009 and earlier) may not support
audio through the HDMI port.
1. Connect the HDMI cable to your computer's HDMI output port.
63
2. Connect the other end to one of the projector's HDMI ports.
Note: The projector converts the digital audio signal sent from your computer into a mono analog signal
for the internal speaker or a stereo analog signal if you are connecting to external speakers.
Parent topic: Connecting to Computer Sources
Connecting to a Computer for Pen Use or USB Mouse Control
If you connected your computer to a Computer or HDMI port on the projector, you also need to connect
the USB cable so you can use the pens with your computer.
Note: You can connect your computer's USB cable to the control pad instead of directly to the projector.
Connecting the USB cable also lets you set up the remote control to act as a wireless mouse, but you
cannot use this feature at the same time you are using the pens with your computer.
1. Connect the USB cable to your projector's USB-B port.
2. Connect the other end to any available USB port on your computer.
64
If you want to use the remote control as a wireless mouse, you need to change the USB Type B setting
in the projector's Extended menu. You may also need to configure your computer to work with an
external USB mouse. See your computer documentation for details.
Parent topic: Connecting to Computer Sources
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Projector Parts - Remote Control
Related tasks
Using the Remote Control as a Wireless Mouse
Connecting to a Computer for Sound
If your computer presentation includes sound and you did not connect it to the projector's USB-B or an
HDMI port, you can still play sound through the projector's speaker system. Just connect an optional
3.5 mm stereo mini-jack audio cable as described here.
1. Connect the audio cable to your laptop's headphone or audio-out jack, or your desktop's speaker or
audio-out port.
2. Connect the other end to the Audio port that corresponds to the Computer port you are using.
Parent topic: Connecting to Computer Sources
Connecting a Computer to the Control Pad
If your computer meets the system requirements, you can send video and audio output to the projector
through the control pad's USB-B port (preferably USB 2.0). Connect the projector and your computer to
the control pad using USB cables.
65
Caution: Make sure the control pad is positioned no more than 6.5 ft (2 m) away from the projector, and
no obstacles are blocking the signal from the projector. Do not place the control pad behind the
projection surface.
Note: This also lets you use the interactive pens with your computer. You need to adjust the USB Type
B setting in the projector's Extended menu before you can project through the USB port. Note that using
USB Display will slow interactive pen function. For the best performance, VGA or HDMI connections are
recommended, in addition to the USB connection for interactive pen usage.
1. Turn on your computer.
2. Make sure a USB cable is connected between the USB-B port on the projector and the USB-A port
on the control pad.
3. Connect another USB cable to the USB port on the bottom of the control pad and any available USB
port on your computer.
4. To use USB Display, do one of the following:
• Windows 8.x: Click EPSON_PJ_UD in the upper right-corner, then select Run EMP_UDSe.exe
in the dialog box that appears to install the Epson USB Display software.
• Windows 7/Windows Vista: Select Run EMP_UDSE.exe in the dialog box that appears to install
the Epson USB Display software.
• Windows XP: Wait as messages appear on your computer screen and the projector installs the
Epson USB Display software on your computer.
• Windows 2000: Select Computer, EPSON_PJ_UD, and EMP_UDSE.EXE to install the Epson
USB Display software.
66
• OS X: The USB Display setup folder appears on your screen. Select USB Display Installer and
follow the on-screen instructions to install the Epson USB Display software.
Follow any on-screen instructions. You need to install this software only the first time you connect
the projector to the computer.
The projector displays the image from your computer's desktop and outputs sound, if your presentation
contains audio.
Parent topic: Connecting to Computer Sources
Connecting to Video Sources
Follow the instructions in these sections to connect video devices to the projector.
Connecting to an HDMI Video Source
Connecting to an MHL-Compatible Device
Connecting to a Component-to-VGA Video Source
Connecting to a Composite Video Source
Connecting to a Video Source for Sound
Parent topic: Projector Connections
Connecting to an HDMI Video Source
If your video source has an HDMI port, you can connect it to the projector using an optional HDMI cable.
The HDMI connection provides the best image quality.
1. Connect the HDMI cable to your video source's HDMI output port.
2. Connect the other end to one of the projector's HDMI ports.
Note: The projector converts the digital audio signal sent from your video source into a mono analog
signal for the internal speaker or a stereo analog signal if you are connecting to external speakers.
67
Parent topic: Connecting to Video Sources
Connecting to an MHL-Compatible Device
If you have an MHL-compatible smartphone or tablet, you can connect it to the projector using either an
MHL cable or an HDMI cable with a device-compatible MHL adapter. If you have a device with a built-in
MHL connector, plug it directly into the HDMI 1/MHL port.
Note: Some connected devices may not charge when using an MHL adapter.
1. Connect the MHL cable or adapter to your device's Micro-USB port.
2. If you are using an MHL adapter, connect it to an MHL-compatible HDMI cable.
3. Connect the other end of the cable to the projector's HDMI 1/MHL port.
Note: The projector converts the digital audio signal sent from your video source into a mono analog
signal for the internal speaker or a stereo analog signal if you are connecting to external speakers.
Parent topic: Connecting to Video Sources
Connecting to a Component-to-VGA Video Source
If your video source has component video ports, you can connect it to the projector using an optional
component-to-VGA video cable. Depending on your component ports, you may need to use an adapter
cable along with a component video cable.
1. Connect the component connectors to your video source's color-coded component video output
ports, usually labeled Y, Pb, Pr or Y, Cb, Cr. If you are using an adapter, connect these connectors
to your component video cable.
68
2. Connect the VGA connector to a Computer port on the projector.
3. Tighten the screws on the VGA connector.
If your image colors appear incorrect, you may need to change the Input Signal setting in the projector's
Signal menu.
Parent topic: Connecting to Video Sources
Connecting to a Composite Video Source
If your video source has a composite video port, you can connect it to the projector using an optional
RCA-style video or A/V cable.
1. Connect the cable with the yellow connector to your video source's yellow video output port.
2. Connect the other end to the projector's Video port.
Parent topic: Connecting to Video Sources
69
Connecting to a Video Source for Sound
You can play sound through the projector's speaker system if your video source has audio output ports.
Connect the projector to the video source using a stereo mini-jack adapter cable (with one 3.5 mm miniplug and two RCA plugs).
Note: If you connected your video source to the projector using an HDMI or MHL cable, the audio signal
is transferred with the video signal; you do not need an additional cable for sound.
1. Connect the audio cable to your video source's audio-out ports.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the projector's Audio port or ports.
Note: To add additional sound, connect your video source and speakers to an audio video receiver,
then connect the receiver to the projector using one of the receiver's compatible video outputs (an
HDMI connection provides the best image quality, if available). You can also connect speakers to
any video source that has its own speaker connections. External powered speakers or headphones
can also be connected to the Audio Out port using a 3.5 mm stereo mini jack cable.
Parent topic: Connecting to Video Sources
Connecting to an External Computer Monitor
If you connected the projector to a computer using a Computer port, you can also connect an external
monitor to the projector. This lets you see your presentation on the external monitor even when the
projected image is not visible.
If you want to output images to an external monitor when the projector is turned off, you need to select
Communication On as the Standby Mode setting and Always On as the A/V Output setting in the
projector's menu system.
70
Note: Monitors that use a refresh rate less than 60 Hz may not be able to display images correctly.
1. Make sure your computer is connected to the projector's Computer port.
2. Connect the external monitor's cable to your projector's Monitor Out port.
Note: Only analog RGB signals from the Computer port can be output to an external monitor.
Note: Content you draw using the interactive features is not displayed on an external monitor unless
you draw it using Easy Interactive Tools.
Parent topic: Projector Connections
Connecting to External Speakers
To enhance the sound from your presentation, you can connect the projector to external self-powered
speakers. You can control the volume using the projector's remote control.
Note: You can also connect the projector to an amplifier with speakers.
If you want to output audio from the external speakers when the projector is turned off, you need to
select Communication On for the Standby Mode setting and Always On for the A/V Output setting in
the projector's menu system. You cannot play audio from the USB-B and LAN ports while the projector
is turned off.
Note: The projector's built-in speaker system is disabled when you connect external speakers.
1. Make sure your computer or video source is connected to the projector with both audio and video
cables as necessary.
71
2. Locate the appropriate cable to connect your external speakers, such as a stereo mini-jack-to-pinjack cable, or another type of cable or adapter.
3. Connect one end of the cable to your external speakers as necessary.
4. Connect the stereo mini-jack end of the cable to your projector's Audio Out port.
Parent topic: Projector Connections
Connecting to External USB Devices
Follow the instructions in these sections to connect external USB devices to the projector.
USB Device Projection
Connecting a USB Device or Camera to the Projector
Connecting a USB Device to the Control Pad or Projector
Selecting the Connected USB Source
Disconnecting a USB Device From the Control Pad or Projector
Parent topic: Projector Connections
USB Device Projection
You can project images and other content without using a computer or video device by connecting any of
these devices to your projector:
• USB flash drive
• Digital camera or smartphone
• USB hard drive
• Multimedia storage viewer
• USB memory card reader
72
Note: Digital cameras or smartphones must be USB-mounted devices, not TWAIN-compliant devices,
and must be USB Mass Storage Class-compliant.
Note: USB hard drives must meet these requirements:
• USB Mass Storage Class-compliant (not all USB Mass Storage Class devices are supported)
• Formatted in FAT or FAT32
• Self-powered by their own AC power supplies (bus-powered hard drives are not recommended)
• Avoid using hard drives with multiple partitions
You can project slide shows from image files on a connected USB device or memory card reader.
Parent topic: Connecting to External USB Devices
Connecting a USB Device or Camera to the Projector
You can connect your USB device or camera to the projector's USB-A port and use it to project images
and other content.
1. If your USB device came with a power adapter, plug the device into an electrical outlet.
2. Connect the USB cable (or USB flash drive or USB memory card reader) to the projector's USB-A
port shown here.
Note: Do not connect a USB hub or a USB cable longer than 10 feet (3 m), or the device may not
operate correctly.
3. Connect the other end of the cable (if applicable) to your device.
Parent topic: Connecting to External USB Devices
73
Connecting a USB Device to the Control Pad or Projector
You can connect your USB device to the USB-A port on the control pad or projector and use it to project
images and other content.
1. If your USB device came with a power adapter, plug the device into an electrical outlet.
2. Make sure a USB cable is connected between the USB-A port on the projector and the USB-B port
on the control pad.
3. Connect the USB cable for the device (or USB flash drive or USB memory card reader) into the
USB-A port on the bottom of the control pad.
4. Connect the other end of the cable (if applicable) to your device.
Note: You can also connect a USB device directly to the projector's USB-A port.
Parent topic: Connecting to External USB Devices
Selecting the Connected USB Source
You can switch the projector's display to the source you connected to the USB-A port on the control pad
or the projector.
1. Make sure the connected USB source is turned on, if necessary.
2. Press the Source Search button on the remote control or control pad, then select USB1.
Parent topic: Connecting to External USB Devices
Disconnecting a USB Device From the Control Pad or Projector
When you finish presenting with a connected USB device, you must prepare to disconnect the device
from the control pad or projector.
74
1. If the device has a power button, turn off and unplug the device.
2. Disconnect the USB device (or cable) from the control pad or projector.
Parent topic: Connecting to External USB Devices
Connecting a Printer to the Control Pad
You can connect an Epson printer or all-in-one device to the Printer port on the control pad and use it to
print your projected and annotated content from the whiteboard.
Note: Make sure the printer meets the control command requirements.
1. Make sure a USB cable is connected between the USB-A port on the projector and the USB-B port
on the control pad.
2. Connect another USB cable to the Printer port on the control pad. Make sure the cable is no longer
than 16.4 ft (5 m).
3. Connect the other end of the cable to the USB type B port on the printer.
Note: You can connect a wireless PCL6-compatible or Epson printer through the Whiteboard
Settings menu.
Supported Printer Types
Parent topic: Projector Connections
Related tasks
Selecting Whiteboard Print Settings
75
Supported Printer Types
You can connect to a printer with the type and command language described here.
Note: Scanning is only supported from Epson All-in-One printers over a USB connection.
Printer type Command language
Scanner
USB
connection
Network
connection
Singlefunction
printer
ESC/Raster
No
Yes
No
Singlefunction
printer
ESC/P-R
No
Yes
Yes
Multi-function ESC/Raster
printer
Yes
Yes
No
Multi-function ESC/P-R
printer
Yes
Yes
Yes
Laser
ESC/Page, ESC/PageColor
No
No
Yes
Laser
PCL6-compatible
No
No
Yes
Parent topic: Connecting a Printer to the Control Pad
Related tasks
Selecting Whiteboard Print Settings
Connecting to a Document Camera
You can connect a document camera to your projector to project images viewed by the camera.
Depending on your Epson document camera model, do one of the following to connect the document
camera to your projector:
• For the Epson DC-06 document camera, locate the USB cable that came with the camera and
connect it to the to the projector's USB-A port and to the document camera's USB Type B port.
• For the Epson DC-11 document camera, connect it to the projector's Computer or Video port and to
the corresponding port on the document camera. See the document camera manual for details.
76
• For the Epson DC-12 document camera, connect it to the projector's HDMI, Computer, or Video port
and to the corresponding port on the document camera. See the document camera manual for details.
• For the Epson DC-20 document camera, connect it to the projector's HDMI, Computer, or Video port
and to the corresponding port on the document camera. See the document camera manual for details.
Note: For additional features supported by software, connect your document camera to your computer
instead of the projector. See the document camera manual for details.
Parent topic: Projector Connections
Connecting Multiple Projectors of the Same Model
If you use the interactive features of multiple projectors of the same model in the same room, you need
to synchronize the projectors. To do this, connect the optional remote control cable set (V12H005C28) to
the SYNC port on each projector.
1. Connect one end of the remote control cable to the SYNC In port on one projector, and connect the
other end to the SYNC Out port on the other projector.
77
Note: If you are connecting three or more projectors, connect the projectors in a chain as shown.
2. In the Extended menu, set the Sync of Projectors setting to Wired.
Note: If you are using the projector in the same room as another projector that does not support
cable connection, set the Wired Sync Mode setting to Mode 2 in the projector's Extended menu. If
you do not have the optional remote control cable, set the Distance of Projectors setting in the
projector's Extended menu to Mode 2.
Parent topic: Projector Connections
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control
The remote control uses the two AA batteries that came with the projector.
Caution: Use only the type of batteries specified in this manual. Do not install batteries of different types,
or mix new and old batteries.
1. Open the battery cover.
78
2. Insert the batteries with the + and – ends facing as shown.
3. Close the battery cover and press it down until it clicks into place.
Warning: Dispose of used batteries according to local regulations. Do not expose batteries to heat
or flame. Keep batteries out of the reach of children; they are choking hazards and are very
dangerous if swallowed.
Parent topic: Setting Up the Projector
Installing Batteries in the Pens
Each pen uses one AA battery.
79
1. Open the battery cover as shown.
2. Insert the battery with the + and – ends facing as shown.
3. Replace the battery cover and press it down until it clicks into place.
Parent topic: Setting Up the Projector
Installing Batteries in the Control Pad
The control pad uses two AA batteries.
80
Note: If you have the optional remote control cable set (ELPKC28), you can use it instead of batteries to
power the control pad.
1. Remove the top cover of the control pad by prying it off as shown.
2. Insert the batteries with the + and – ends facing as shown.
81
3. Replace the cover and press it down until it clicks into place.
Parent topic: Setting Up the Projector
82
Using the Projector on a Network
Follow the instructions in these sections to set up your projector for use on a network.
Wired Network Projection
Wireless Network Projection
Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts
Setting Up Monitoring Using SNMP
Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser
Creating an Address Book
Adding Templates from a Web Browser
Crestron RoomView Support
Wired Network Projection
You can send images to your projector through a wired network. To do this, you connect the projector to
your network, and then set up your projector and computer for network projection.
After connecting and setting up the projector as described here, install the network software from the
Epson Projector Software CD or download the software as necessary. Use the following software and
documentation to set up, control, and monitor network projection:
• EasyMP Network Projection software sets up your computer for network projection. See the EasyMP
Network Projection Operation Guide for instructions.
• EasyMP Monitor software (Windows only) lets you monitor and control your projector through the
network. You can download the latest software and documentation from the Epson web site. Go to
epson.com/support (U.S.) or epson.ca/support (Canada) and select your projector.
• Connect to a Network Projector (Windows 7 and Windows Vista only)
• EasyMP Multi PC Projection software allows you to hold interactive meetings by projecting the
computer screens of users over a network. See the EasyMP Multi PC Projection Operation Guide for
instructions.
• EasyMP Network Updater software (Windows only) allows you to update firmware for a projector over
a wired LAN. See the EasyMP Network Updater Operation Guide for instructions. You can download
the latest software and documentation from the Epson web site. Go to epson.com/support (U.S.) or
epson.ca/support (Canada) and select your projector.
83
Note: If your projector is connected via a LAN cable to a network that includes a wireless access point,
you can connect to the projector wirelessly through the access point using the EasyMP Network
Projection software.
Connecting to a Wired Network
Selecting Wired Network Settings
Parent topic: Using the Projector on a Network
Connecting to a Wired Network
To connect the projector to a wired local area network (LAN), use a 100Base-TX or 10Base-T network
cable. To ensure proper data transmission, use a Category 5 shielded cable or better.
1. Connect one end of the network cable to your network hub, switch, or router.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the projector's LAN port.
Parent topic: Wired Network Projection
Selecting Wired Network Settings
Before you can project from computers on your network, you must select the network settings for the
projector using its menu system.
Note: Make sure you already connected the projector to your wired network using the LAN port.
1. Turn on the projector.
2. Press the Menu button.
84
3. Select the Network menu and press Enter.
4. Select Network Configuration and press Enter.
5. Select the Basic menu and press Enter.
85
6. Select the following basic options as necessary:
• Projector Name lets you enter a name up to 16 alphanumeric characters long to identify the
projector over the network.
• PJLink Password lets you enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters long for using the
PJLink protocol for projector control.
• Web Control Password or Web Remote Password lets you enter a password up to 8
alphanumeric characters long for accessing the projector over the web. (Default user name is
EPSONWEB; default password is admin.)
• Projector Keyword lets you turn on a security password to prevent access to the projector by
anyone not in the room with it. You must enter a displayed, randomized keyword from a computer
using the EasyMP Network Projection software to access the projector.
Note: Use the displayed keyboard to enter the name, passwords and keyword. Press the arrow
buttons on the remote control to highlight characters and press Enter to select them.
7. Select the Wired LAN menu and press Enter.
8. If necessary, select IP Settings and press Enter.
9. Select your IP Settings as necessary:
• If your network assigns addresses automatically, turn on the DHCP setting.
86
• If you must set addresses manually, turn off DHCP and enter the projector's IP Address, Subnet
Mask, DNS server, WINS server,and Gateway Address as needed. When manually entering IP
Settings, you cannot use restricted IP addresses.
Note: To highlight the numbers you want from the displayed keyboard, press the arrow buttons on
the remote control. To select a highlighted number, press Enter. Or, press and hold the Num button
on the remote control while entering the desired numbers.
10. To prevent display of the IP address on the standby screen, turn off IP Address Display.
11. When you finish selecting settings, select Complete or Setup Complete and follow the on-screen
instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.
Restricted IP Addresses
Parent topic: Wired Network Projection
Related references
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu
Restricted IP Addresses
When manually entering IP Settings, you cannot use certain ranges of IP addresses:
Setting
Restricted IP addresses
IP Address
0.0.0.0
127.x.x.x
192.0.2.x
224.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Subnet Mask
0.0.0.0
255.255.255.255
Gateway Address
0.0.0.0
197.x.x.x
224.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
DNS Server
127.x.x.x
192.0.2.x
224.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
87
Setting
Restricted IP addresses
WINS Server
0.0.0.0
192.0.2.x
224.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
If you are not setting a WINS server, use 0.0.0.0.
Parent topic: Selecting Wired Network Settings
Wireless Network Projection
You can send images to your projector through a wireless network. To do this, you must install the
Epson 802.11b/g/n wireless LAN module, and then set up your projector and computer for wireless
projection.
Note: If your projector is connected via a LAN cable to a network that includes a wireless access point,
you can connect to the projector wirelessly using the EasyMP Network Projection software or other
supported Epson network software.
There are two ways to connect the projector to your wireless network:
• Using the optional Quick Wireless Connection USB Key (Windows only)
• Configuring the connection manually using the projector's Network menus
After installing the module and setting up the projector, install the network software from the Epson
Projector Software CD or download the software, as necessary. Use the following software and
documentation to set up, control, and monitor wireless projection:
• EasyMP Network Projection software sets up your computer for wireless network projection. See the
EasyMP Network Projection Operation Guide for instructions.
• EasyMP Monitor software (Windows only) lets you monitor and control your projector through the
network. You can download the latest software and documentation from the Epson web site. Go to
epson.com/support (U.S.) or epson.ca/support (Canada) and select your projector.
• EasyMP Multi PC Projection software allows you to hold interactive meetings by projecting the
computer screens of users over a network. See the EasyMP Multi PC Projection Operation Guide for
instructions.
• Projection from iOS or Android devices with the wireless LAN module and free Epson iProjection app;
visit epson.com/projectorapp (U.S.) or epson.ca/projectorapp (Canada) for more information.
Installing the Wireless LAN Module
88
Using Quick Wireless Connection (Windows Only)
Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually
Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Windows
Selecting Wireless Network Settings in OS X
Enabling WPA or EAP Security
Parent topic: Using the Projector on a Network
Installing the Wireless LAN Module
To use the projector over a wireless network, install the Epson 802.11b/g/n wireless module in the
projector. Do not install any other type of wireless module.
Caution: Never remove the module while its indicator light is green or flashing, or while you are
projecting wirelessly. You may damage the module or lose data.
1. Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.
89
2. Unscrew and remove the cable cover if it is attached (screwdriver not included).
3. Insert the wireless LAN module into the port shown here.
90
4. Replace the cable cover and tighten the screws.
5. Plug in and turn on the projector.
Parent topic: Wireless Network Projection
Using Quick Wireless Connection (Windows Only)
You can use the Quick Wireless Connection USB Key to quickly connect the projector to a Windows
computer wirelessly. Then you can project your presentation and remove the key when you are done.
Note: The Quick Wireless Connection USB Key is not included with your projector.
1. Turn on the projector.
2. Connect the USB key to the projector's USB-A port.
Note: If the control pad is connected to the projector, you can also connect the USB key to the USBA port on the control pad, as shown:
You see a projected message that the network information update is complete.
3. Remove the USB key.
4. Connect the USB key to a USB port on your computer or laptop.
Note: In Windows Vista, if you see the AutoPlay window, select Run LaunchU3.exe, then select
Allow on the next screen.
91
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the Quick Wireless Connection driver.
Note: If you see a Windows Firewall message, click Yes to disable the firewall.
After a few minutes, your computer image is displayed by the projector. If it does not appear, press
the Source Search button on your remote control and select the LAN source, or restart your
computer.
6. Run your presentation as necessary.
7. When you finish projecting wirelessly, select the Safely Remove Hardware option in the Windows
taskbar, then remove the USB key from your computer.
Note: You may need to restart your computer to reactivate your wireless LAN connection.
Parent topic: Wireless Network Projection
Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually
Before you can project from your wireless network, you must select the network settings for the projector
using its menu system.
1. Turn on the projector.
2. Press the Menu button.
3. Select the Network menu and press Enter.
92
4. Select Network Configuration and press Enter.
5. Select the Basic menu and press Enter.
6. Select the following basic options as necessary:
• Projector Name lets you enter a name up to 16 alphanumeric characters long to identify the
projector over the network.
• Web Remote Password lets you enter a password up to 8 alphanumeric characters long for
accessing the projector over the web.
• Projector Keyword lets you turn on a security password to prevent access to the projector by
anyone not in the room with it. You must enter a displayed, randomized keyword from a computer
using the EasyMP Network Projection software to access the projector.
Note: Use the displayed keyboard to enter the name, passwords and keyword. Press the arrow
buttons on the remote control to highlight characters and press Enter to select them.
93
7. Select the Wireless LAN menu and press Enter.
8. Select the settings on the Wireless LAN menu as necessary for your network.
9. When you finish selecting settings, select Setup complete and follow the on-screen instructions to
save your settings and exit the menus.
After you complete the wireless settings for your projector, you need to select the wireless network on
your computer.
Wireless LAN Menu Settings
Parent topic: Wireless Network Projection
Wireless LAN Menu Settings
Setting
Options
Description
Wireless LAN Power
On
Turns wireless LAN support on
and off
Off
Wi-Fi Protected Setup
To Setup Wizard
94
Select To Setup Wizard to start
the WPS Connection Setup utility
Setting
Options
Description
Wireless LAN System
802.11b/g
Sets the type of wireless LAN
system the projector is
connecting to
802.11b/g/n
Connection Mode
Quick
Advanced
Selects the type of wireless
connection:
Quick: lets you quickly connect
to one computer or use the
optional Quick Wireless
Connection USB key to connect.
If the SSID Auto Setting is set to
On, the projector becomes an
easy access point. If SSID Auto
Setting is set to Off, the network
is created in Ad hoc mode.
Advanced: lets you connect to
multiple computers via a wireless
network access point
(infrastructure mode)
SSID Auto Setting
On
Turns on automatic SSID
searching in Quick connection
mode; set to Off when
connecting to multiple projectors
at the same time
Off
SSID
Up 32 alphanumeric characters
Sets the SSID (network name) of
the wireless LAN system the
projector is connecting to
Search Access Point
To Search View
Search for available wireless
network access points in
Advanced connection mode
Channel
1ch
In Quick connection mode,
selects the frequency band
(channel) used by the wireless
LAN
6ch
11ch
95
Setting
Options
Description
SSID Display
On
Selects whether to display the
SSID on the network standby
screen
Off
DHCP
On
Turns on DHCP if your network
assigns addresses automatically;
set to Off to manually enter the
network's IP Address, Subnet
Mask, and Gateway Address
Off
DNS Server
IP address
Sets the IP address for the DNS
server. The DNS server resolves
the host name entered during
email configuration
WINS server
IP address
Sets the IP address for the
network folder where images are
saved; this setting is used
(instead of the UNC address)
when the folder is on a different
network segment from the
projector
IP Address Display
On
Selects whether to display the IP
address on the network standby
screen
Off
Parent topic: Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually
Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Windows
Before connecting to the projector, select the correct wireless network on your computer.
1. To access your wireless utility software, double-click the network icon on the Windows taskbar.
2. Do one of the following:
• If your projector is set up on an existing network (Advanced mode), select the network name
(SSID).
• If your projector is configured for Quick mode, select the projector's SSID.
3. Click Connect.
96
Parent topic: Wireless Network Projection
Selecting Wireless Network Settings in OS X
Before connecting to the projector, select the correct wireless network in OS X.
1. Click the AirPort icon on the menu bar at the top of the screen.
2. Make sure AirPort is turned on, then do one of the following:
• If your projector is set up on an existing network (Advanced mode), select the network name
(SSID).
• If your projector is configured for Quick mode, select the projector's SSID.
Parent topic: Wireless Network Projection
Enabling WPA or EAP Security
Set up the WPA or EAP security settings to match your network's settings. Check with your network
administrator for guidance on entering the correct information.
1. Select a WPA or EAP setting from the drop-down menu.
2. Select the settings on the security menu as necessary for your network.
97
3. When you finish selecting settings, select Setup complete and follow the on-screen instructions to
save your settings and exit the menus.
Wireless Security Menu Settings
Parent topic: Wireless Network Projection
Wireless Security Menu Settings
Settings on the Security menu let you select the type of security and security settings that match the
network you are connecting the projector to.
Setting
Options
Description
Security
Open
Selects the type of security used
on the wireless network
WPA/WPA2-PSK
WPA/WPA2-EAP
Passphrase
Various passphrases from 8 to
63 characters
For WPA/WPA2-PSK security,
selects the pre-shared
passphrase used on the network
Note: You can enter up to 32
characters in the projector menu.
To input more than 32
characters, use your Web
browser.
In Quick mode, the initial
passphrase is hidden. Change
the passphrase to connect using
Epson iProjection.
EAP Method
PEAP
PEAP-TLS
EAP-TLS
EAP-Fast
LEAP
98
For WPA/WPA2-EAP security,
selects the protocol for
authentication
Setting
Options
Description
User name
Various user names up to 64
characters
For WPA/WPA2-EAP security,
selects the user name;
automatically detected when
using the PEAP-TLS or EAPTLS EAP methods
Note: You can enter up to 32
characters in the projector menu.
To input more than 32
characters, use your Web
browser.
Password
Various passwords up to 64
characters
For WPA/WPA2-EAP security,
selects the password for EAP
authentication
Note: You can enter up to 32
characters in the projector menu.
To input more than 32
characters, use your Web
browser.
Client Certificate
—
For WPA/WPA2-EAP security,
displays the certificate's Issued
to, Issued by, and Validity
period if a client certificate has
been set
Verify Server Certificate
On
For WPA/WPA2-EAP security,
selects whether to verify the
server certificate when a CA
certificate has been set
Off
CA certificate
—
For WPA/WPA2-EAP security,
displays the certificate's Issued
to, Issued by, and Validity
period if a CA certificate has
been set
99
Setting
Options
Description
Setting RADIUS Server Name
On
Off
For WPA/WPA2-EAP security,
selects whether to verify the
authentication server name
during certificate verification
Various server names up to 32
characters
For WPA/WPA2-EAP security,
selects the server name to verify
RADIUS Server Name
Verify Exp. date of Server Cert. On
For WPA/WPA2-EAP security,
selects whether to verify the
server certificate's validity period
during certificate verification
Off
Parent topic: Enabling WPA or EAP Security
Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts
You can set up the projector to send you an e-mail alert over the network if there is a problem with the
projector.
1. Press the Menu button.
2. Select the Network menu and press Enter.
3. Select Network Configuration and press Enter.
100
4. Select the Administrator Settings menu and press Enter, then select Mail Notification and press
Enter.
5. Enter the IP address for the SMTP Server option.
Note: Do not use these addresses: 127.x.x.x or 224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255 (where x is a
number from 0 to 255).
6. Select a number for the SMTP server Port Number, from 1 to 65535 (default is 25).
7. Choose an Email Address field, enter the e-mail address, and select the alerts you want to receive
there. Repeat for up to three addresses.
Note: Your e-mail address can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long.
8. When you finish selecting settings, select Setup Complete and follow the on-screen instructions to
save your settings and exit the menus.
Note: If a critical problem causes the projector to shut down, you may not receive an e-mail alert.
Network Projector E-mail Alert Messages
101
Parent topic: Using the Projector on a Network
Network Projector E-mail Alert Messages
When a problem occurs with a networked projector, and you selected to receive e-mail alerts, you
receive an e-mail containing the following information:
• Epson Projector on the subject line
• The name of the projector experiencing a problem
• The IP address of the affected projector
• Detailed information about the problem
Note: If a critical problem causes a projector to shut down, you may not receive an e-mail alert.
Parent topic: Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts
Setting Up Monitoring Using SNMP
Network administrators can install SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) software on network
computers so they can monitor projectors. If your network uses this software, you can set up the
projector for SNMP monitoring.
1. Press the Menu button.
2. Select the Network menu and press Enter.
3. Select Network Configuration and press Enter.
102
4. Select the Administrator Setting menu and press Enter, then select the SNMP menu and press
Enter.
5. Enter up to two IP addresses to receive SNMP notifications, using 0 to 255 for each address field.
Note: Do not use these addresses: 127.x.x.x or 224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255 (where x is a
number from 0 to 255).
6. Enter the community name of SNMP (up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters).
7. When you finish selecting settings, select Setup Complete and follow the on-screen instructions to
save your settings and exit the menus.
Parent topic: Using the Projector on a Network
Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser
Once you have connected your projector to your network, you can select projector settings and control
projection using a compatible web browser. This lets you access the projector remotely.
Note: The web setup and control features support Microsoft Internet Explorer 8.0 or later, and Safari on
networks that do not use a proxy server for connection. You cannot select all of the projector menu
settings or control all projector functions using a web browser.
103
Note: If you want to use a web browser to select settings when the projector is turned off, you need to
adjust the Standby Mode settings in the ECO menu.
1. Make sure the projector is turned on.
2. Start your web browser on a computer connected to the network.
3. Type the projector's IP address into the browser's address box and press the computer's Enter key.
You see the Web Control screen and a prompt to enter a user ID and password.
4. Enter the following information in uppercase or lowercase letters, exactly as shown:
• For the user ID, enter EPSONWEB. (You cannot change the user ID.)
• For the password, enter the default password admin. (You can change the Web Control password
using the projector's Network menu.)
5. To select projector menu settings, select the name of the menu and follow the on-screen instructions
to select settings.
6. To control projection remotely, select the Web Remote option.
Note: If the Web Remote Password is set to On, the user ID for the remote is EPSONREMOTE.
You see this screen:
1
Power button control
104
2
Captures the projected image. Switch to whiteboard mode to paste the image into a new
page.
3
Prints the projected image.
4
Freeze button control
5
A/V Mute button control
6
Page Up and Page Down button controls
7
Searches for sources
8
Switches to whiteboard mode.
9
Saves the projected image in .png format.
10
Volume button controls
11
Closed Caption control
7. Select the icon corresponding to the projector function you want to control.
Parent topic: Using the Projector on a Network
Related references
Wireless Security Menu Settings
Creating an Address Book
When sending e-mails from whiteboard mode, you can choose e-mail addresses from an address book .
You can create the address book by loading a text file of up to 999 addresses through the web control
page.
Note: Addresses are displayed in the order they appear in the text file.
1. Create the text file containing the list of addresses you want to add to the address book. The file
must have the following characteristics:
• Tab-delimited
• Each line must contain a pair of strings separated by a tab: <name> <tab> <email_address>
• Filename with a .txt extension
• Character code must be Unicode
An example of a text file:
105
2. Open a web browser and connect to the projector by entering the IP address of the projector.
Note: You can find the projector's IP address in the projector's Network menu.
3. Enter the user name and password at the prompts.
4. Select the config icon.
Note: This icon does not appear when you connect from a computer.
The Web Control page is displayed.
5. Select Whiteboard Settings > Administrator Settings > Address Book Settings > Address
Book File and select the Choose File button.
6. Select the address book file and select Set.
The address book file is uploaded to the projector.
7. To delete the address book, select Whiteboard Settings > Administrator Settings > Address
Book Settings > Delete Address Book and select Set.
Parent topic: Using the Projector on a Network
Related references
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu
Adding Templates from a Web Browser
You can use a web browser to add templates for use in Whiteboard mode. You can add up to 5 images,
which must be in .png format to be used as templates.
1. Make sure the projector is turned on.
2. Start your web browser on a computer connected to the network.
3. Type the projector's IP address into the browser's address box and press the computer's Enter key.
You see the Web Control screen and a prompt to enter a user ID and password.
4. Enter the following information in uppercase or lowercase letters, exactly as shown:
• For the user ID, enter EPSONWEB. (You cannot change the user ID.)
106
• For the password, enter the default password admin. (You can change the Web Control password
using the projector's Network menu.)
5. Under Whiteboard Settings, select Administrator Settings.
You see a screen like this:
6. Under Template Settings, select the number of the template you are uploading.
7. Select the Browse button, select the .png image on your computer, and select Open.
8. Select Set to upload the template to the projector.
Parent topic: Using the Projector on a Network
Crestron RoomView Support
If you are using the Crestron RoomView network monitoring and control system, you can set up your
projector for use on the system. Crestron RoomView lets you control and monitor your projector using a
web browser.
Note: You cannot use the Epson Web Control feature or the Message Broadcasting plug-in for EasyMP
Monitor when you use Crestron RoomView.
For additional information on Crestron RoomView, contact Crestron.
107
Setting Up Crestron RoomView Support
Controlling a Networked Projector Using Crestron RoomView
Parent topic: Using the Projector on a Network
Setting Up Crestron RoomView Support
To set up your projector for monitoring and control using a Crestron RoomView system, make sure your
computer and projector are connected to the network.
Note: If you want to use the Crestron RoomView system when the projector is turned off, you need to
adjust the Standby Mode settings in the ECO menu.
1. Press the Menu button.
2. Select the Network menu and press Enter.
3. Select Network Configuration and press Enter.
4. Select the Administrator Setting menu and press Enter.
5. Set the Crestron RoomView setting to On to allow the projector to be detected.
6. Turn off the projector, then turn it on again to enable the setting.
108
Parent topic: Crestron RoomView Support
Controlling a Networked Projector Using Crestron RoomView
Once you have set up your projector to use Crestron RoomView, you can control and monitor projection
using a compatible web browser.
1. Start your web browser on a computer connected to the network.
2. Type the projector's IP address into the browser's address box and press the computer's Enter key.
You see this screen:
3. Select the input source that you want to control in the Sources List box. You can scroll through
available sources using the up and down arrows in the box.
4. To control projection remotely, click the on-screen buttons that correspond to the projector's remote
control buttons. You can scroll through button options at the bottom of the screen.
Note: These on-screen buttons do not directly correspond to the projector's remote control buttons:
• OK acts as the Enter button
• Menu displays the projector's menu
5. To view information about the projector, click the Info tab.
6. To change projector, Crestron, and password settings, click the Tools tab, select settings on the
displayed screen, and click Send.
109
7. When you finish selecting settings, click Exit to exit the program.
Parent topic: Crestron RoomView Support
110
Using Basic Projector Features
Follow the instructions in these sections to use your projector's basic features.
Turning On the Projector
Turning Off the Projector
Selecting the Language for the Projector Menus
Setting the Date and Time
Image Shape
Resizing the Image with the Wide and Tele Buttons
Adjusting the Image Position
Focusing the Image
Remote Control Operation
Selecting an Image Source
Projection Modes
Image Aspect Ratio
Color Mode
Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons
Projecting a PC Free Presentation
Turning On the Projector
Turn on the computer or video equipment you want to use before you turn on the projector so it can
display the image source.
111
1. Connect the power cord to the projector's power inlet.
2. Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet.
Note: With Direct Power On turned on, the projector turns on as soon as you plug it in.
The projector's power light turns blue. This indicates that the projector is receiving power.
3. Press the power button on the projector or the remote control to turn on the projector.
The projector beeps and the Status light flashes blue as the projector warms up. Once the projector
is warmed up, the Status light stops flashing and turns blue.
Warning: Never look into the projector lens when the lamp is on. This can damage your eyes and is
especially dangerous for children.
112
If you do not see a projected image right away, try the following:
• Turn on the connected computer or video device.
• Press the Source Search button on the projector or remote control to detect the video source.
Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Turning Off the Projector
Before turning off the projector, shut down any computer connected to it so you can see the computer
display during shutdown.
Note: Turn off this product when not in use to prolong the life of the projector. Lamp life will vary
depending upon mode selected, environmental conditions, and usage. Brightness decreases over time.
Note: When using the A/V Mute feature, the projector lamp is still on. To turn off the lamp, turn off the
projector.
1. Press the power button on the projector or the remote control.
The projector displays a shutdown confirmation screen.
2. Press the power button again. (To leave it on, press any other button.)
The projector beeps twice, the lamp turns off, and the Status light turns off.
Note: With Epson's Instant Off technology, there is no cool-down period so you can pack up the
projector for transport right away (if necessary).
113
Caution: Do not turn the projector on immediately after turning it off. Turning the projector on and off
frequently may shorten the life of the lamp.
3. To transport or store the projector, make sure the Status light is off, then unplug the power cord.
Caution: To avoid damaging the projector or lamp, never unplug the power cord when the Status
light is on or flashing.
Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features
Selecting the Language for the Projector Menus
If you want to view the projector's menus and messages in another language, you can change the
Language setting.
1. Turn on the projector.
2. Press the Menu button.
114
3. Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
4. Select the Language setting and press Enter.
5. Select the language you want to use and press Enter.
6. Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.
Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Setting the Date and Time
You must set the projector's date and time to schedule projector events and use wireless LAN
authentication.
1. Press the Menu button.
2. Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
3. Select the Time/Schedule Settings setting and press Enter.
115
The Schedule Settings screen appears.
4. Select the Date & Time setting and press Enter.
5. Do one of the following:
• Enter the date and time settings using the on-screen keyboard.
• Select On as the Use Internet Time setting and enter the IP address for the time server in the
Internet Time Server field.
6. Select Change DST Settings and select the Daylight Savings Time setting for your location.
7. When you are finished, press the Esc button.
8. Select Setup complete and select Yes to save your changes.
116
Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features
Related tasks
Enabling WPA or EAP Security
Related topics
Scheduling Projector Events
Image Shape
You can project an evenly rectangular image by placing the projector directly in front of the center of the
screen and keeping it level. If you place the projector at an angle to the screen, or tilted up or down, or off
to the side, you may need to correct the image shape for the best display quality.
Note: For interactive use, the image must be evenly rectangular, without distortion.
Correcting Image Shape with the Keystone Buttons
Correcting Image Shape with Quick Corner
Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features
Correcting Image Shape with the Keystone Buttons
You can use the projector's keystone correction buttons to correct the shape of an image that is
unevenly rectangular on the sides.
Note: For interactive use, make sure the degree of horizontal and vertical keystone correction is no more
than ± 3°.
1. Turn on the projector and display an image.
Note: You can display a pattern to aid in adjusting the projected image using the Settings menu.
Note: You can also display the pattern by pressing the User button on the remote control (if the test
pattern is assigned to this button).
117
2. Press one of these keystone buttons on the control panel to display the Keystone adjustment
screen.
118
3. Press a keystone button on the projector's control panel to adjust the image shape.
Note: The horizontal keystone adjustment buttons are labeled Wide and Tele.
After correction, your image is slightly smaller.
Note: If the projector is installed out of reach, you can also correct the image shape with the remote
control using the Keystone settings in the projector menus.
Parent topic: Image Shape
119
Correcting Image Shape with Quick Corner
You can use the projector's Quick Corner setting to correct the shape and size of an image that is
unevenly rectangular on all sides.
1. Turn on the projector and display an image.
Note: You can display a pattern to aid in adjusting the projected image using the Settings menu.
Note: You can also display the pattern by pressing the User button on the remote control (if the test
pattern is assigned to this button).
2. Press the Menu button.
3. Select the Settings menu and press Enter.
4. Select the Keystone setting and press Enter.
5. Select the Quick Corner setting and press Enter. Then press Enter again.
120
You see the Quick Corner adjustment screen:
6. Use the arrow buttons on the projector or the remote control to select the corner of the image you
want to adjust. Then press Enter.
7. Press the arrow buttons to adjust the image shape as necessary.
8. When you are finished, press Esc.
Note: Using Quick Corner can affect the accuracy of the interactive pens.
Parent topic: Image Shape
Resizing the Image with the Wide and Tele Buttons
1. Turn on the projector and display an image.
2. To enlarge the image size, press the Wide button on the projector's control panel.
121
3. To reduce the image size, press the Tele button.
After you adjust the image size, the Image Shift screen is displayed automatically for adjusting the
image position.
Note: If the projector is installed out of reach, you can also adjust the image size with the remote
control using the Zoom setting in the projector menus.
Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features
Related references
Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu
Adjusting the Image Position
You can use the Image Shift feature to adjust the image position without moving the projector.
Note: This feature is not available if the Zoom option is set to the widest setting.
122
1. Turn on the projector and display an image.
2. Adjust the image size using the Wide and Tele buttons.
After you adjust the image size, the Image Shift screen is displayed automatically.
3. Use the arrow buttons on the projector or remote control to adjust the image position.
Note: You can also use the Settings menu to adjust the Image Shift setting.
Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features
Related references
Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu
Focusing the Image
1. Turn on the projector and display an image.
Note: You can display a pattern to aid in adjusting the projected image using the Settings menu.
2. Slide the switch to open the air filter cover on the side of the projector.
123
3. Raise or lower the focus lever to sharpen the image.
Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features
Related references
Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu
Remote Control Operation
The remote control lets you control the projector from almost anywhere in the room, up to 19.7 feet (6 m)
away. You can point it at the screen or board, or the front or back of the projector.
124
Make sure that you aim the remote control at the projector's receivers within the angles listed here.
1
19.7 feet (6 m)
2
± 30°
3
± 55°
4
60°
5
75°
6
15°
Note: Avoid using the remote control in conditions with bright fluorescent lights or in direct sunlight, or
the projector may not respond to commands. If you will not use the remote control for a long time,
remove the batteries.
Using the Remote Control as a Wireless Mouse
Using the Remote Control as a Pointer
Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features
125
Using the Remote Control as a Wireless Mouse
You can use the projector's remote control as a wireless mouse so you can control projection at a
distance from the computer.
Note: This feature cannot be used at the same time as the interactive pens. If you want to use the
remote control as a wireless mouse, you need to change the USB Type B setting in the projector's
Extended menu.
1. Connect the projector to a computer using the projector's USB-B, Computer, or HDMI port to
display video.
Note: You cannot use the wireless mouse feature with an MHL connection.
2. If you connected your computer to the Computer or HDMI port, also connect a USB cable to the
projector's USB-B port and to a USB port on your computer (for wireless mouse support).
3. Start your presentation.
4. Use the following buttons on the remote control to control your presentation:
• To move through slides or pages, press the up or down Page buttons.
• To move the cursor on the screen, use the arrow buttons.
• To left-click, press the
button once (press it twice to double-click).
• To right-click, press the Esc button.
• To drag-and-drop, hold the
at the destination.
button as you move the cursor with the arrow buttons, then release
126
Parent topic: Remote Control Operation
Using the Remote Control as a Pointer
You can use the projector's remote control as a pointer to help you call out important information on the
screen. The default pointer shape is an arrow, but you can select an alternative shape using the Settings
menu.
1. Press the Pointer button on the remote control.
2. Use the arrow buttons on the remote control to move the pointer on the screen.
3. Press Esc to clear the pointer from the screen.
Parent topic: Remote Control Operation
Selecting an Image Source
If you connected multiple image sources to the projector, such as a computer and DVD player, you may
want to switch from one image source to the other.
1. Make sure the connected image source you want to use is turned on.
2. For video image sources, insert a DVD or other video media and press its play button, if necessary.
127
3. Press the Source Search button on the projector, remote control, or control pad, then select the
source you want.
Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features
Related tasks
Selecting a Networked Device Source
Projection Modes
Depending on how you positioned the projector, you may need to change the projection mode so your
images project correctly.
• Front lets you project from a table in front of the screen.
128
• Front/Upside Down (default setting) flips the image over top-to-bottom to project upside-down from a
wall or ceiling mount. This mode should also be used when you mount the projector vertically on a
table to create an interactive work surface.
• Rear flips the image horizontally to project from behind a translucent screen.
• Rear/Upside Down flips the image over top-to-bottom and horizontally to project from the wall or
ceiling and behind a translucent screen.
Note: The two Rear modes cannot be used with the interactive pens.
You can change the projection mode using the remote control or by changing the Projection setting in
the Extended menu.
Changing the Projection Mode Using the Remote Control
Changing the Projection Mode Using the Menus
Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Changing the Projection Mode Using the Remote Control
You can change the projection mode to flip the image over top-to-bottom.
1. Turn on the projector and display an image.
2. Hold down the A/V Mute button on the remote control for five seconds.
The image disappears briefly and reappears flipped top-to-bottom.
3. To change projection back to the original mode, hold down the A/V Mute button for five seconds
again.
129
Parent topic: Projection Modes
Changing the Projection Mode Using the Menus
You can change the projection mode to flip the image over top-to-bottom and/or left-to-right using the
projector menus.
1. Turn on the projector and display an image.
2. Press the Menu button.
3. Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
4. Select the Projection setting and press Enter.
5. Select a projection mode and press Enter.
6. Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.
Parent topic: Projection Modes
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Image Aspect Ratio
The projector can display images in different width-to-height ratios called aspect ratios. Normally the
input signal from your video source determines the image's aspect ratio. However, for certain images
you can change the aspect ratio to fit your screen by pressing a button on the remote control.
130
If you always want to use a particular aspect ratio for a certain video input source, you can select it using
the projector's menus.
Changing the Image Aspect Ratio
Available Image Aspect Ratios
Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features
Changing the Image Aspect Ratio
You can change the aspect ratio of the displayed image to resize it.
1. Turn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.
2. Press the Aspect button on the remote control.
The shape and size of the displayed image changes, and the name of the aspect ratio appears
briefly on the screen.
3. To cycle through the available aspect ratios for your input signal, press the Aspect button
repeatedly.
Parent topic: Image Aspect Ratio
Available Image Aspect Ratios
You can select the following image aspect ratios, depending on the input signal from your image source.
Note: Black bands and cropped images may project in certain aspect ratios, depending on the aspect
ratio and resolution of your input signal.
131
Aspect ratio setting
Description
Auto
Automatically sets the aspect ratio according to the input signal and
the Resolution setting.
Normal
Displays images using the full projection area and maintains the
aspect ratio of the image.
16:9
Converts the aspect ratio of the image to 16:9.
Full
Displays images using the full width of the projection area, but does
not maintain the aspect ratio.
Zoom
Displays images using the full width of the projection area and
maintains the aspect ratio of the image.
Native
Displays images as is (aspect ratio and resolution are maintained).
Note: The Auto aspect ratio setting is available only for HDMI image sources.
Parent topic: Image Aspect Ratio
Color Mode
The projector offers different Color Modes to provide optimum brightness, contrast, and color for a
variety of viewing environments and image types. You can select a mode designed to match your image
and environment, or experiment with the available modes.
If you always want to use a particular color mode for a certain video input source, you can select it using
the projector menus.
Changing the Color Mode
Available Color Modes
Turning On Auto Iris
Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features
Changing the Color Mode
You can change the projector's Color Mode using the remote control to optimize the image for your
viewing environment.
1. Turn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.
2. If you are projecting from a DVD player or other video source, insert a disc or other video media and
press the play button, if necessary.
132
3. Press the Color Mode button on the remote control to change the Color Mode.
The image appearance changes and the name of the Color Mode appears briefly on the screen.
4. To cycle through all the available Color Modes for your input signal, press the Color Mode button
repeatedly.
Parent topic: Color Mode
Available Color Modes
You can set the projector to use these Color Modes, depending on the input source you are using:
Color Mode
Description
Dynamic
Best for video games in a bright room
Presentation
Best for color presentations in a bright room
Theatre
Best for movies projected in a dark room
Photo
Best for still images projected in a bright room
Sports
Best for television images in a bright room
sRGB
Best for standard sRGB computer displays
Whiteboard
Best for presentations onto a whiteboard (adjusts the colors
accordingly)
DICOM SIM
Best for projecting X-rays and other medical images (shows clear
shadows)
Customized
Best for customizing a color mode using manual RGBCMY
settings in the Image > Advanced menu
133
Note: The projector is not a medical device and cannot be used for medical diagnosis.
Parent topic: Color Mode
Related references
Image Quality Settings - Image Menu
Turning On Auto Iris
In certain color modes, you can turn on the Auto Iris setting to automatically optimize the image based on
the brightness of the content you project.
1. Turn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.
2. Press the Menu button.
3. Select the Image menu and press Enter.
4. Select the Auto Iris setting and choose one of the following:
• High Speed to adjust brightness as soon as the scene changes.
• Normal for standard brightness adjustment.
Note: You can set Auto Iris for each Color Mode that supports the feature. You cannot change the
Auto Iris setting when you are using a Closed Caption setting.
5. Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.
134
Parent topic: Color Mode
Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons
You can use the Volume buttons on the remote control to adjust the volume as you project a
presentation with audio. The volume buttons control the projector’s internal speaker system or any
external speakers you connected to the projector.
You must adjust the volume separately for each connected input source.
1. Turn on the projector and start a presentation that includes audio.
2. To lower or raise the volume, press the Volume buttons on the remote control.
A volume gauge appears on the screen.
3. To set the volume to a specific level for an input source, use the projector menus.
Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features
Projecting a PC Free Presentation
You can use your projector's PC Free feature whenever you connect a USB device that contains
compatible image or movie files. This lets you quickly and easily display and control them using the
projector's remote control. You can also display a slide show of the images.
Supported PC Free File Types
Starting a PC Free Slide Show
Starting a PC Free Movie Presentation
Starting a PC Free PDF File Presentation
Slideshow Display Options
Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features
135
Supported PC Free File Types
You can project these types of files using the projector's PC Free feature.
Note: For best results, place your files on media that is formatted in FAT16/32. If you have trouble
projecting from media formatted for non-Windows file systems, try formatting the media for Windows
instead. You may not be able to use the security features on certain USB storage devices with PC Free
features. When connecting a USB-compatible hard drive, connect the AC adapter supplied with the
drive.
Graphic and Text File Formats
File contents
File type
(extension)
Details
Image
.jpg
Make sure the file is not:
• CMYK format
• Progressive format
• Highly compressed
• Above 8192 × 8192 resolution
• Over 12MB in size
• Named with a .jpeg extension
.bmp
Make sure the file resolution is not above 2048 × 2048
.gif
Make sure the file is not:
• Above 2048 × 2048 resolution
• Animated
PDF
.png
Make sure the file resolution is not above 2048 × 2048
.pdf
Make sure the file is not:
• Saved in PDF version 1.7 or earlier format
• Encrypted
Movie File Formats
136
File type
(extension)
Movie codec
Audio codec
Recording quality
.mpg
MPEG-2
MPEG-1 Layer 1/2
Maximum bit rate: 12 Mbps
You can play back MPEG
contents with no audio.
Maximum resolution: 1280 ×
720
You cannot play back audio
from Linear PCM and AC-3
content.
Make sure the file is not
named with an .mpeg
extension.
.mp4
MPEG-4 ASP
MPEG-4 AAC-LC
MPEG-4 AVC
.wmv
WMV9
WMA
.avi
Motion JPEG
Linear PCM
ADPCM
Note: For best results, do not use a USB storage device with a slow access speed or the movies may
not play back correctly. You cannot project files to which DRM (Digital Rights Management) is applied.
Parent topic: Projecting a PC Free Presentation
Starting a PC Free Slide Show
After connecting a USB device or digital camera to the projector, you can switch to the USB input source
and start your slide show.
Note: You can change the PC Free operation options or add special effects by highlighting Option at the
bottom of the screen and pressing Enter.
1. Press the Source Search button on the projector, remote control, or Control Pad, or tap the Source
Select icon on the whiteboard.
2. Select the USB1 source.
137
The PC Free screen appears.
3. Do the following as necessary to locate your files:
• If you need to display files inside a subfolder on your device, press the arrow buttons to highlight
the folder and press the Enter button.
• To move back up a folder level on your device, highlight Back to Top and press Enter.
• To view additional files in a folder, highlight Next page or Previous page and press Enter, or
press the Page up or down buttons on the remote control.
4. Do one of the following:
• To display an individual image, press the arrow buttons to highlight the image and press Enter.
(Press the Esc button to return to the file list screen.)
• To display a slide show of all the images in a folder, press the arrow buttons to highlight the
Slideshow option at the bottom of the screen and press Enter.
Note: If any file names are longer than 8 characters or include unsupported symbols, the file names
may be shortened or changed only in the screen display.
138
5. While projecting, use the following commands to control the display as necessary:
• To rotate a displayed image, press the up or down arrow button.
• To move to the next or previous image, press the left or right arrow button.
6. To stop the display, follow the on-screen instructions or press the Esc button.
Parent topic: Projecting a PC Free Presentation
Starting a PC Free Movie Presentation
After connecting a USB device or digital camera to the projector, you can switch to the USB input source
and start your movie.
Note: You can change the PC Free operation options by highlighting Option at the bottom of the screen
and pressing Enter.
1. Press the Source Search button on the projector, remote control, or Control Pad, or tap the Source
Select icon on the whiteboard. Select the USB1 source.
The PC Free screen appears.
139
2. Do the following as necessary to locate your files:
• If you need to display files inside a subfolder on your device, press the arrow buttons to highlight
the folder and press the Enter button.
• To move back up a folder level on your device, highlight Back to Top and press Enter.
• To view additional files in a folder, highlight Next page or Previous page and press Enter, or
press the Page up or down buttons on the remote control.
3. To play back a movie, press the arrow buttons to highlight the file and press Enter.
Note: If any file names are longer than 8 characters or include unsupported symbols, the file names
may be shortened or changed only in the screen display. If you want to play back all the movies in a
folder in sequence, select the Slideshow option at the bottom of the screen.
4. To stop movie playback, press the Esc button, highlight Exit, and press Enter.
Parent topic: Projecting a PC Free Presentation
Starting a PC Free PDF File Presentation
After connecting a USB device to the projector, you can switch to the USB input source and start your
PDF file presentation.
Note: You cannot do the following while presenting a PDF file from a USB device:
• Release a password
• Display e-signatures, JPEG2000 images, transparent effects, 3D artwork, or comments
• Play multimedia content
1. Press the Source Search button on the projector, remote control, or Control Pad, or tap the Source
Select icon on the whiteboard. Select the USB1 source.
140
The PC Free screen appears.
2. Do the following as necessary to locate your files:
• If you need to display files inside a subfolder on your device, press the arrow buttons to highlight
the folder and press the Enter button.
• To move back up a folder level on your device, highlight Back to Top and press Enter.
• To view additional files in a folder, highlight Next page or Previous page and press Enter.
3. To display the first page of a PDF file at full size, press the arrow buttons to highlight the file and
press Enter. (Press the Esc button to return to the file list screen.)
Note: If any file names are longer than 8 characters or include unsupported symbols, the file names
may be shortened or changed only in the screen display. If a PDF file extension is not .pdf, the file
does not appear in the file list.
4. While projecting a PDF file, use the following commands to control the display as necessary:
• To move to the next or previous page, press the up or down arrow button.
141
• To display a menu of pages to select from, press the Esc button. Then press the left or right arrow
button to select a page and press Enter.
• To enlarge the view of a page to fit the screen, press Enter. Press Enter again to return to
standard size display.
• To rotate a displayed page, press the left or right arrow button.
5. To stop the display, press the Esc button, press the up or down arrow button to highlight EXIT, and
press Enter.
Parent topic: Projecting a PC Free Presentation
Slideshow Display Options
You can select these display options when using the projector's Slideshow feature.
Setting
Options
Description
Display Order
Name Order
Displays files in name order
Date Order
Displays files in date order
In Ascending
Sorts files in first-to-last order
In Descending
Sorts files in last-to-first order
On
Displays a slide show continuously
Off
Displays a slide show one time through
Sort Order
Continuous Play
142
Setting
Options
Description
Screen Switching
Time
No
Does not display the next file automatically
1 Second to 60 Seconds
Displays files for the selected time and
switches to the next file automatically; high
resolution images may switch at a slightly
slower rate
Wipe
Transitions between images with a wipe effect
Dissolve
Transitions between images with a dissolve
effect
Random
Transitions between images using a random
variety of effects
Effect
Parent topic: Projecting a PC Free Presentation
143
Adjusting Projector Features
Follow the instructions in these sections to use your projector's feature adjustments.
Shutting Off the Picture and Sound Temporarily
Stopping Video Action Temporarily
Zooming Into and Out of Images
Scheduling Projector Events
Projector Security Features
Creating a User Pattern to Display
Shutting Off the Picture and Sound Temporarily
You can temporarily turn off the projected picture and sound if you want to redirect your audience's
attention during a presentation. Any sound or video action continues to run, however, so you cannot
resume projection at the point that you stopped it.
If you want to display an image such as a company logo or picture when the presentation is stopped, you
can set up this feature using the projector's menus.
1. Press the A/V Mute button on the remote control to temporarily stop projection and mute any sound.
2. To turn the picture and sound back on, press A/V Mute again.
Parent topic: Adjusting Projector Features
144
Stopping Video Action Temporarily
You can temporarily stop the action in a video or computer presentation and keep the current image on
the screen. Any sound or video action continues to run, however, so you cannot resume projection at the
point that you stopped it.
Note: You can also stop video action using the interactive pens.
1. Press the Freeze button on the remote control to stop the video action.
2. To restart the video action in progress, press Freeze again.
Parent topic: Adjusting Projector Features
Zooming Into and Out of Images
You can draw attention to parts of a presentation by zooming into a portion of the image and enlarging it
on the screen.
Note: You can also zoom into your image using the interactive pens.
145
1. Press the E-Zoom + button on the remote control.
You see a crosshair on the screen indicating the center of the zoom area.
2. Use the following buttons on the remote control to adjust the zoomed image:
• Use the arrow buttons to position the crosshair in the image area you want to zoom into.
• Press the E-Zoom + button repeatedly to zoom into the image area, enlarging it as necessary.
Press and hold the E-Zoom + button to zoom in more quickly.
• To pan around the zoomed image area, use the arrow buttons.
• To zoom out of the image, press the E-Zoom – button as necessary.
• To return to the original image size, press Esc.
Parent topic: Adjusting Projector Features
Scheduling Projector Events
You can save a projector command, such as turning the projector on or off or switching input sources, as
an "event". You can schedule when you want the projector to automatically execute the command.
Note: The Time/Schedule Protection setting in the Password Protection menu must be turned off to
schedule an event.
Saving a Scheduled Event
Viewing Scheduled Events
Editing Scheduled Events
Parent topic: Adjusting Projector Features
146
Related tasks
Setting a Password
Saving a Scheduled Event
You can select projector commands you want to perform and schedule them as an event.
1. Press the Menu button.
2. Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
3. Select the Time/Schedule Settings setting and press Enter.
The Schedule Settings screen appears.
4. Select the Schedule menu and press Enter.
5. Select Add New and press Enter.
6. In the Event Settings section, select the events you want to have occur. (Select No Change for
events that you do not want to occur.)
7. In the Date/Time Settings section, set the date and time for the scheduled events to occur.
8. When you are finished, select Save and press Enter.
9. To schedule more events, repeat the previous 4 steps.
10. Select Setup complete and select Yes to save your changes.
Parent topic: Scheduling Projector Events
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Viewing Scheduled Events
You can view your scheduled events on the calendar displayed on the Schedule Settings screen.
1. Press the Menu button on the remote control or control panel.
2. Select the Extended menu.
3. Select Time/Schedule Settings.
147
4. Select Schedule.
The Schedule Settings screen is displayed.
Colored boxes on the calendar indicate the following:
One-time event
Repeating event
Communication is on or off
Event is invalid
5. To view an event, press the left and right arrow buttons on the remote to select a day.
The screen displays the details of the events scheduled for that day. A
enabled event; a
event.
gray icon indicates a disabled event, and the
blue icon indicates an
icon indicates a repeating
Parent topic: Scheduling Projector Events
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Editing Scheduled Events
You can edit your scheduled events on the calendar displayed on the Schedule Settings screen.
1. Press the Menu button on the remote control or control panel.
2. Select the Extended menu.
148
3. Select Time/Schedule Settings.
4. Select Schedule.
The Schedule Settings screen is displayed.
Colored boxes on the calendar indicate the following:
One-time event
Repeating event
Communication is on or off
Event is invalid
5. To edit an event, press the up and down arrow buttons on the remote to highlight an event.
Note: While an event is selected, pressing the
6. Press the Esc button and choose an option..
• On/Off: Enables or disables the event
• Edit: Edits the settings for the event
• Clear: Deletes the event
7. Select Edit and change the settings for the event.
8. Select Save.
You see the new event on the Schedule screen.
Parent topic: Scheduling Projector Events
149
button will enable or disable the event.
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Projector Security Features
You can secure your projector to deter theft or prevent unintended use by setting up the following
security features:
• Password security to prevent the projector from being turned on, and prevent changes to the startup
screen and other settings.
• Button lock security to block operation of the projector using the buttons on the control panel.
• Security cabling to physically cable the projector in place.
Password Security Types
Locking the Projector's Buttons
Installing a Security Cable
Parent topic: Adjusting Projector Features
Password Security Types
You can set up these types of password security using one shared password:
• Power On Protection password prevents anyone from using the projector without first entering a
password.
• User's Logo Protection password prevents anyone from changing the custom screen the projector
can display when it turns on or when you use the A/V Mute feature. The presence of the custom
screen discourages theft by identifying the projector’s owner.
• Network Protection password prevents anyone from changing the network settings in the projector
menus.
• Time/Schedule Protection password prevents anyone from changing the projector's time or
schedule settings.
Setting a Password
Selecting Password Security Types
Entering a Password to Use the Projector
Saving a User's Logo Image to Display
Parent topic: Projector Security Features
150
Setting a Password
To use password security, you must set a password.
1. Hold down the Freeze button on the remote control for about ten seconds or until you see this menu.
2. Press the down arrow to select Password and press Enter.
You see the prompt "Change the password?".
3. Select Yes and press Enter.
4. Press and hold down the Num button on the remote control and use the numeric buttons to set a
four-digit password.
The password displays as **** as you enter it. Then you see the confirmation prompt.
5. Enter the password again.
You see the message "Password accepted."
6. Press Esc to return to the menu.
151
7. Make a note of the password and keep it in a safe place in case you forget it.
Parent topic: Password Security Types
Selecting Password Security Types
After setting a password, you see this menu, allowing you to select the password security types you want
to use.
If you do not see this menu, hold down the Freeze button on the remote control for five seconds until the
menu appears.
1. To prevent unauthorized use of the projector, select Power On Protection, press Enter, select On,
press Enter again, and press Esc.
2. To prevent changes to the User's Logo screen or related display settings, select User's Logo
Protection, press Enter, select On, press Enter again, and press Esc.
3. To prevent changes to network settings, select Network Protection, press Enter, select On, press
Enter again, and press Esc.
4. To prevent changes to the projector's time or schedule settings, select Time/Schedule Protection,
press Enter, select On, press Enter again, and press Esc.
You can attach the Password Protect sticker to the projector as an additional theft deterrent.
Note: Be sure to keep the remote control in a safe place; if you lose it, you will not be able to enter the
password required to use the projector.
Parent topic: Password Security Types
Related references
Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu
152
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu
Related tasks
Turning On the Projector
Saving a User's Logo Image to Display
Related topics
Scheduling Projector Events
Entering a Password to Use the Projector
If a password is set up and a Power On Protection password is enabled, you see a prompt to enter a
password whenever you turn on the projector.
You must enter the correct password to use the projector.
1. Press and hold down the Num button on the remote control while you enter the password using the
numeric buttons.
153
The password screen closes.
2. If the password is incorrect, the following may happen:
• You see a "wrong password" message and a prompt to try again. Enter the correct password to
proceed.
• If you enter an incorrect password several times in succession, the projector displays a request
code and a message to contact Epson Support. When you contact Epson Support, provide the
displayed request code and proof of ownership for assistance in unlocking the projector.
Parent topic: Password Security Types
Related tasks
Selecting Password Security Types
Saving a User's Logo Image to Display
You can transfer an image to the projector and then display it whenever the projector turns on. You can
also display the image when the projector is not receiving an input signal or when you temporarily stop
projection (using the A/V Mute feature). This transferred image is called the User's Logo screen.
The image you select as the User's Logo can be a photo, graphic, or company logo, which is useful in
identifying the projector's owner to help deter theft. You can prevent changes to the User's Logo by
setting up password protection for it.
1. Display the image you want to project as the User's Logo.
2. Press the Menu button, select the Extended menu, and press Enter.
154
3. Select the User's Logo setting and press Enter.
You see a prompt asking if you want to use the displayed image as a user's logo.
4. Select Yes and press Enter.
You see a selection box overlaying your image.
5. Use the arrow buttons on the remote control to surround the image area you want to use as the
User's Logo and press Enter.
You see a prompt asking if you want to select this image area.
6. Select Yes and press Enter. (If you want to change the selected area, select No, press Enter, and
repeat the last step.)
You see the User's Logo zoom factor menu.
7. Select a zoom percentage and press Enter.
You see a prompt asking if you want to save the image as the User's Logo.
8. Select Yes and press Enter.
Note: It takes a few moments for the projector to save the image; do not use the projector, its remote
control, or any connected equipment until it is finished.
You see a completion message.
9. Press Esc to exit the message screen.
10. Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
11. Select Display and press Enter.
155
12. Select when you want to display the User's Logo screen:
• To display it whenever there is no input signal, select Display Background and set it to Logo.
• To display it whenever you turn the projector on, select Startup Screen and set it to On.
• To display it whenever you press the A/V Mute button, select A/V Mute and set it to Logo.
To prevent anyone from changing the User's Logo settings without first entering a password, set a
password and enable User's Logo security.
Parent topic: Password Security Types
Related tasks
Setting a Password
Locking the Projector's Buttons
You can lock the buttons on the projector's control panel to prevent anyone from using the projector. You
can lock all the buttons or all the buttons except the power button.
1. Press the Menu button.
2. Select the Settings menu and press Enter.
3. Select the Control Panel Lock setting and press Enter.
4. Select one of these lock types and press Enter:
• To lock all of the projector's buttons, select Full Lock.
156
• To lock all buttons except the power button, select Partial Lock.
You see a confirmation prompt.
5. Select Yes and press Enter.
Unlocking the Projector's Buttons
Parent topic: Projector Security Features
Unlocking the Projector's Buttons
If the projector's buttons have been locked, hold the Enter button on the projector's control panel for
seven seconds to unlock them.
Parent topic: Locking the Projector's Buttons
Installing a Security Cable
You can install two types of security cables on the projector to deter theft.
• Use the security slot on the projector to attach a Kensington Microsaver Security system, available
from Epson.
• Use the security cable attachment point on the projector to attach a wire cable and secure it to a room
fixture or heavy furniture.
Note: Do not pass drop-prevention cables through the security cable attachment point when mounting
the projector on a wall or ceiling.
Parent topic: Projector Security Features
157
Creating a User Pattern to Display
You can transfer an image to the projector and then display it as a pattern to aid in presentations when
you use the Pattern Display feature. This transferred image is called the User Pattern.
1. Display the image you want to project as the User Pattern from a connected computer or video
source.
2. Press the Menu button, select the Settings menu, and press Enter.
3. Select the Pattern setting and press Enter.
4. Select the User Pattern setting and press Enter.
You see a prompt asking if you want to use the displayed image as a User Pattern.
5. Select Yes and press Enter.
Note: It takes a few moments for the projector to save the image; do not use the projector, its remote
control, or any connected equipment until it is finished.
You see a completion message.
6. Press Esc to exit the message screen.
Parent topic: Adjusting Projector Features
158
Using the Interactive Features
Follow the instructions in these sections to use your projector's interactive features.
Interactive Modes
Using the Interactive Pens
Using Finger Touch Interactivity
Using BrightLink With a Computer
Whiteboard Mode
Annotation Mode (PC Free)
Splitting the Screen
Interactive Modes
The BrightLink interactive features turn any wall into an interactive whiteboard, either with or without a
computer. These interactive modes are available:
• In whiteboard mode, you can use one or both interactive pens or your finger (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi)
to write on the projected "whiteboard". You can split the screen and interact with the whiteboard and
another source. You can insert images from a thumbdrive or scanner and save, print, or email your
"pages," without connecting a computer.
• In annotation mode (PC Free Annotation), you can annotate over content projected from a computer,
tablet, document camera, or other source. You can capture your annotated pages, then save or print
them. You can even split the screen and annotate on two images at the same time, using one or both
pens.
• In PC Interactive mode, you can use the interactive pen or your finger (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi) as a
mouse to navigate, select, and scroll through content from your computer. You can split the screen
and interact with two projected images at the same time.
Note: You can also use the Easy Interactive Tools software to provide additional interactive features,
such as saving your annotations and printing them. See the online Easy Interactive Tools Operation
Guide for detailed instructions.
Parent topic: Using the Interactive Features
Related concepts
Whiteboard Mode
Using BrightLink With a Computer
159
Annotation Mode (PC Free)
Using the Interactive Pens
The BrightLink interactive pens turn any wall into an interactive whiteboard, either with or without a
computer.
• With a computer, you can use Easy Interactive Tools. This software lets you use the pen as a mouse
to annotate, save, and interact with content from your computer. Two people can annotate at the same
time.
• Without a computer, you can use the built-in toolbar. This lets you annotate images from a document
camera, iPad, DVD player, or other source.
Follow the instructions in these sections to use the interactive pens.
Using the Pens
Pen Calibration
Parent topic: Using the Interactive Features
Related concepts
Easy Interactive Tools
Related tasks
Selecting a Networked Device Source
Using the Pens
Your projector came with a blue pen and an orange pen, identified by the color on the end of the pen.
You can use either pen, or both pens at the same time (one of each color), with Easy Interactive Tools.
Make sure the pen batteries are installed.
160
Note: The pen turns off automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity. Tap the pen tip or press the button on
the side to turn the pen back on.
1
Pen tip
2
Battery light
3
Power/function button
4
Attachment for optional strap or cord
5
Battery cover
• To turn on the pen, tap the pen tip or press the power/function button.
Note: If you press the button, the battery light flashes briefly, then turns off. If the battery is low, the
battery light flashes continuously.
161
• For best performance, hold the pen perpendicular to the board, as shown below. Do not cover the
black section near the tip of the pen.
• To write or draw on the projection surface in annotation mode or whiteboard mode, do the following:
• To select a projected item, such as an icon, tap the projection surface with the pen tip.
• To draw on the projected screen, tap the projection surface with the pen and drag it as necessary.
• To move the pointer, hover over the surface without touching it.
• To switch the pen from drawing tool to eraser, press the power/function button on the side.
162
• To use the pen as a mouse in PC Interactive mode, do the following:
• To left-click, tap the board with the pen tip.
• To double-click, tap twice.
• To right-click, press the power/function button on the side.
• To click and drag, tap and drag with the pen.
• To move the cursor, hover over the board without touching it.
Note: If you do not want to use the hovering feature, you can turn it off using the Easy Interactive
Function setting in the projector's Extended menu.
Parent topic: Using the Interactive Pens
Related concepts
Whiteboard Mode
Using BrightLink With a Computer
Annotation Mode (PC Free)
Pen Calibration
Calibration coordinates the position of the pen with the location of your cursor. You only need to calibrate
the first time you use your projector's interactive features. Calibration results remain until you calibrate
again.
Be sure to calibrate the pen before performing finger touch calibration (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi).
If you notice positioning discrepancies after doing any of the following, calibrate again:
• Performing Keystone correction
• Adjusting the image size
163
• Using the Image Shift feature
• Moving the projector
Note: Move any pen you are not using away from the projection screen while calibrating.
Calibrating Automatically
Calibrating Manually
Parent topic: Using the Interactive Pens
Related tasks
Correcting Image Shape with the Keystone Buttons
Resizing the Image with the Wide and Tele Buttons
Adjusting the Image Position
Calibrating Automatically
You do not need the pens or a computer for Auto Calibration.
Note: You can start Auto Calibration by pressing the User button on the remote control or by pressing
the Menu button on the remote control as described here.
1. Press the Menu button, select the Extended menu, and press Enter.
164
2. Select the Easy Interactive Function setting and press Enter.
3. Select Auto Calibration and press Enter.
4. Adjust the image focus, if necessary.
5. Press Enter to select Yes.
A pattern appears then disappears, and the system is calibrated. If you see a message that
calibration failed, you need to calibrate manually.
165
The cursor location and pen position should match after calibration. If not, you may need to calibrate
manually.
Parent topic: Pen Calibration
Calibrating Manually
If the cursor location and pen position do not match after auto calibration, you can calibrate manually.
1. Press the Menu button, select the Extended menu, and press Enter.
2. Select the Easy Interactive Function setting and press Enter.
166
3. Select Manual Calibration and press Enter.
4. Adjust the image focus, if necessary.
5. Press Enter to select Yes.
A flashing green circle appears in the upper left corner of your projected image.
6. Touch the center of the circle with the tip of the pen.
The circle disappears, and you see another circle below the first one.
167
Note: For the most accurate calibration, make sure you touch the center of the circle.
7. Touch the center of the next circle, then repeat. When you get to the bottom of the column, the next
circle appears at the top of a new column.
Note: Make sure you are not blocking the signal between the pen and the interactive receiver (next
to the projection window on the projector).
If you make a mistake, press the Esc button on the remote control to go back to the previous circle.
To restart the calibration process, press and hold the Esc button for 2 seconds.
8. Continue until all of the circles disappear.
Parent topic: Pen Calibration
168
Using Finger Touch Interactivity
You can use your finger to perform the same functions as the interactive pens when you install the
Touch Unit (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi).
Note: See the Installation Guide for detailed instructions on installing the Touch Unit.
Touch Unit Safety Instructions
Calibrating for Finger Touch Interactivity
Using Finger Touch Operations
Parent topic: Using the Interactive Features
Related concepts
Whiteboard Mode
Using BrightLink With a Computer
Annotation Mode (PC Free)
Related tasks
Adjusting the Angle of the Touch Unit
Touch Unit Safety Instructions
The Touch Unit enables finger touch interactivity with your projector (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi). Do not
connect it to any other projectors or devices.
A built-in, high-power laser is emitted from the laser diffusion ports on the back of the Touch Unit.
169
Follow these precautions when using the Touch Unit and finger touch interactivity:
• Children using finger touch interactivity should always be accompanied by an adult.
• Never disassemble or modify the Touch Unit.
• Do not look into the laser diffusion ports on the back of the Touch Unit. The laser can damage your
eyes. Extra care should be taken when children are present.
• Do not allow the laser light from the Touch Unit to pass through or be reflected by any optical devices,
such as a magnifying glass or mirror. This could cause personal injury or fire.
• Do not view the laser light from the Touch Unit using an optical device such as an eye loupe,
magnifying glass, or microscope, especially within 2.75 inches (70 mm) of the laser diffusion ports.
This could damage your eyes.
• Unplug the projector from the electrical outlet and refer all repairs to qualified service personnel if any
problems occur with the Touch Unit.
The Touch Unit is a Class 1 laser product that complies with IEC/EN60825-1:2007. The labels indicating
the Class 1 laser product and warnings are located in the following areas on the Touch Unit:
170
Parent topic: Using Finger Touch Interactivity
Calibrating for Finger Touch Interactivity
Finger touch calibration coordinates the positioning of your finger with the location of the cursor
(BrightLink Pro 1430Wi).
Note: Make sure you have calibrated the pens before calibrating for finger touch interactivity.
1. Press the Menu button, select the Extended menu, and press Enter.
171
2. Select the Easy Interactive Function setting and press Enter.
3. Select Touch Unit Setup and press Enter.
4. Select Touch Calibration and press Enter.
172
The following screen appears:
5. Adjust the image focus, if necessary.
6. Press Enter to select Yes.
A flashing green circle appears in the upper left corner of your projected image.
7. Touch and hold the center of the circle with your finger until the circle disappears and another circle
appears, then release it.
The circle disappears, and you see another circle below the first one.
173
Note: For the most accurate calibration, make sure you touch the center of the circle with the tip of
your finger.
Note: Make sure you are not blocking the signal between your finger and the interactive receiver
(next to the projection window on the projector).
8. Touch the center of the next circle with your finger and continue until all of the circles disappear.
When you get to the bottom of a column, the next circle appears at the top of a new column.
Note: If you make a mistake, press the Esc button on the remote control to go back to the previous
circle. To restart the calibration process, press and hold the Esc button for 2 seconds.
9. If the cursor location and your finger position do not match, repeat these steps to calibrate again.
174
Parent topic: Using Finger Touch Interactivity
Related tasks
Adjusting the Angle of the Touch Unit
Using Finger Touch Operations
Using Finger Touch Operations
You can use your finger to interact with the projected screen, just as you would use an interactive pen
(BrightLink Pro 1430Wi). You can use either a pen or your finger, or use both at the same time.
When performing touch operations with your finger, you can use two fingers in annotation and
whiteboard modes.
1. Calibrate the pens.
2. Install the Touch Unit as described in your mount's Installation Guide.
3. Adjust the angle of the Touch Unit if it was not adjusted during installation.
4. Calibrate for finger touch interactivity.
5. Turn on your projector. This automatically turns on the Touch Unit also.
The blue light on the Touch Unit remains lit.
175
6. To write or draw on the projection surface in annotation mode or whiteboard mode, do the following:
• To select a projected item, such as an icon, tap the projection surface with your finger.
• To draw on the projected screen, tap the projection surface with your finger and drag it as
necessary.
7. To use your finger as a mouse in PC Interactive mode, do the following:
• To left-click, tap the board with your finger.
• To double-click, tap twice with your finger.
• To right-click, press the board with your finger for about 3 seconds.
• To click and drag, press on and drag an item with your finger.
• To scroll, drag your finger on the screen.
8. If your operating system supports these functions, you can also do the following:
• To zoom in or out, touch an item using two fingers and either move your fingers away from each
other (zoom in) or toward each other (zoom out).
• To rotate an image, touch the image with your fingers and rotate your hand.
176
• To drag up or down on a page, or move backward or forward in a browser window, use swiping
gestures or flicks.
Note: Finger touch operations may not work correctly with long or artificial nails, or fingers wearing
bandages. If your fingers are too close together or crossed, or your sleeve touches the screen, finger
touch may not be recognized. Some operating systems may not support gestures.
Parent topic: Using Finger Touch Interactivity
Related tasks
Calibrating for Finger Touch Interactivity
Using BrightLink With a Computer
You can connect a computer to the projector and install the software from the CD labeled "Epson
Projector Software for Easy Interactive Function." You can then do the following:
• Use the pens or your finger (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi) as a mouse to control your computer
• Use the Easy Interactive Tools software to annotate with both pens or a combination of pen and finger
touch (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi) at the same time
Note: See the online Easy Interactive Tools Operation Guide for detailed information.
• Save and print your annotations
• Use the Tablet PC input panel in Windows 8.x, Windows 7, or Windows Vista
• Use Ink Tools for annotation in Microsoft Office applications
PC Interactive Mode System Requirements
Switching to PC Interactive Mode
Controlling Computer Features from a Projected Screen (PC Interactive Mode)
Adjusting the Pen Operation Area
Easy Interactive Tools
Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools
Parent topic: Using the Interactive Features
PC Interactive Mode System Requirements
Your computer system must meet the system requirements here to use PC Interactive mode and Easy
Interactive Tools.
177
Note: Easy Interactive Driver must be installed and running to use Easy Interactive Tools on a Mac.
Requirement
Windows
Mac
Operating system
Windows XP Professional SP2 or later,
Home Edition
OS X 10.5.x, 10.6.x, OS X 10.7.x,
10.8.x, 10.9.x (32-bit)
Windows Vista Ultimate, Enterprise,
Business, Home Premium, and Home
Basic (32-bit)
OS X 10.6.x, OS X 10.7.x, 10.8.x,
10.9.x (64-bit)
Windows 8.x Pro, Enterprise, Windows 7
Ultimate, Enterprise, Professional, Home
Premium, and Home Basic (32- and 64bit)
CPU
Intel Pentium M 1.6 GHz or faster (Core2 Power PC G4 1.5 GHz or faster
Duo 1.2 GHz or faster recommended)
(Core Duo 1.83 GHz or faster
recommended)
Memory
512MB or more (1G or more recommended)
Hard disk space
100MB or more
Display
Resolution between 1024 × 768 and 1920 × 1200, 16-bit color or greater
Parent topic: Using BrightLink With a Computer
Related concepts
Easy Interactive Tools
Switching to PC Interactive Mode
You can easily switch between PC Free annotation and PC interactive modes. Although you can use
both pens in PC interactive mode, this may cause interference in some applications that only support
one pen. To avoid interference, turn off the unused pen or move it away from the projection surface.
• To switch to PC interactive mode, select the
Mouse icon.
• To switch back to annotation mode, select the
Parent topic: Using BrightLink With a Computer
178
Pen mode icon on the toolbar, then select the
Mouse icon, then select the
Pen mode icon.
Controlling Computer Features from a Projected Screen (PC Interactive Mode)
You can navigate, select, and interact with your computer programs from the projected screen using the
interactive pens or your finger (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi) just as you would a mouse.
Note: OS X users need to install the Easy Interactive Driver before using PC Interactive mode. Go to
epson.com/support (U.S.) or epson.ca/support (Canada) and select your projector.
1. Connect the projector to your computer using a USB cable.
2. Turn on your projector and project your computer screen.
3. Press the Menu button on the remote control, select the Extended menu, and press the Enter
button.
4. Select the USB Type B setting and press the Enter button.
5. Select one of the following:
• Easy Interactive Function to use PC Interactive mode.
• USB Display/Easy Interactive Function to use PC Interactive mode and USB Display.
• Wireless Mouse/USB Display to use the mouse and USB Display
6. Press the Esc button to exit the USB Type B menu.
179
7. Select the Easy Interactive Function setting and press the Enter button.
8. Select one of the following as the Pen Operation Mode depending on your projector model and
computer operating system (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi):
BrightLink Pro 1420Wi:
• Two Users/Mouse: Lets you use both interactive pens as a mouse
• One User/Mouse: Lets you use one interactive pen as a mouse
• One User/Pen: Uses the Windows pen and ink feature (Windows 8.x, Windows 7, and Windows
Vista)
BrightLink Pro 1430Wi:
• Mode 1: Windows XP or earlier
• Mode 2: Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8.x, and OS X
• Mode 3: Linux
9. Press the Enter button on the remote control and press the Menu button to exit the Extended menu.
10. Hover near or tap on the board or the projected image with the interactive pen or your finger
(BrightLink Pro 1430Wi).
The
icon is displayed on the projected screen.
180
11. Select the
icon, then select the
icon.
You can now operate the computer using the interactive pens or your finger (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi).
Parent topic: Using BrightLink With a Computer
Adjusting the Pen Operation Area
If you connect a different computer or adjust the computer's resolution, the pen operation area is
adjusted automatically to match your mouse pointer position. If you intend to only use a single computer
with the projector, set Auto Adjust Pen Area to Off. If you will be using many computers with the
projector, set Auto Adjust Pen Area to On.If you notice that the pen position is incorrect when using PC
Interactive mode, you can adjust the pen area manually.
Note: Manual adjustment is not available when projecting from a LAN source.
1. Project your computer's desktop.
2. Press the Menu button, select the Extended menu, and press Enter.
181
3. Select the Easy Interactive Function setting and press Enter.
4. Select Advanced in the PC Interactive section and press Enter.
5. Select Manual Adj. Pen Area and press Enter.
182
You see this screen:
6. Press Enter to select Yes.
The mouse pointer moves toward the top left corner.
7. When the mouse pointer stops at the top left corner of the image, touch the tip of the pointer with the
interactive pen.
The mouse pointer moves toward the bottom right corner.
8. When the mouse pointer stops at the bottom right corner of the image, touch the tip of the pointer
with the interactive pen.
Parent topic: Using BrightLink With a Computer
Easy Interactive Tools
Your projector came with a CD containing the Easy Interactive Tools software for use with a computer.
Easy Interactive Tools lets you use your interactive pen or finger (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi) as a mouse to
navigate, select, scroll, draw, save, and interact with projected content from your computer.
These two modes are available:
• Annotation (interactive) mode displays the toolbar on the projected image and lets you use the pen or
finger (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi) as a mouse to open applications, access links, and operate scroll bars,
for example (using one pen at a time). You can also annotate whatever is displayed from your
computer (using both pens at the same time).
• Whiteboard mode lets you project on one of 3 solid colors or 6 background patterns, and use the
toolbar to write or draw on the background. You can also import images from your computer or a
document camera. In full screen whiteboard mode, two people can use the pens at the same time.
Finger touch is also available in whiteboard mode. (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi)
Note: For detailed instructions on using the Easy Interactive Tools software, see the online Easy
Interactive Tools Operation Guide or the online help.
183
Parent topic: Using BrightLink With a Computer
Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools
If you are using Windows 8.x, Windows 7, or Windows Vista, you can use the pen input and Ink tools to
add input and annotations to your work. You can also use these features over a network when you set
the interactive features to be available on your network. See the EasyMP Network Projection Operation
Guide for instructions on setting up your computer for network projection.
Enabling Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools
Using Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools
Parent topic: Using BrightLink With a Computer
Enabling Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools
To use the pen input and Ink tools in Windows 8.x, Windows 7, or Windows Vista, you need to adjust the
pen operation mode in your projector's menus.
1. Press the Menu button, select the Extended menu, and press Enter.
184
2. Select the Easy Interactive Function setting and press Enter.
3. Select Pen Operation Mode and press Enter.
4. Select one of the following:
• One User/Pen (BrightLink Pro 1420Wi)
• Mode 1 or Mode 2 when using Ink tools (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi); this also lets you use Windows
multi-touch features
185
• Mode 2 when using pen input (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi)
Parent topic: Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools
Using Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools
If you are using Windows 8.x, Windows 7, or Windows Vista, you can add handwritten input to your work
and convert it to text.
If you have Microsoft Office 2003 or later, you can also use the Ink function to add handwritten notes to a
Word document, Excel spreadsheet, or PowerPoint presentation.
Note: Option names for the annotation functions may vary depending on your version of Microsoft
Office.
• To open the Touch Keyboard in Windows 8.x, right-click or tap-and-hold on the Taskbar, and select
Toolbars > Touch Keyboard. Select the keyboard icon on the screen and select the pen icon.
• To open the Tablet PC input panel in Windows 7 or Windows Vista, select
Accessories > Tablet PC > Tablet PC Input Panel.
> All Programs >
You can write in the box using the interactive pen or your finger (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi), and select
from a variety of options to edit and convert the text.
• To add Ink annotations in Microsoft Office applications, select the Review menu, and select Start
Inking.
Note: In Microsoft Word or Excel, select the Insert tab and select Start Inking.
186
• To annotate your PowerPoint slides in Slideshow mode, press the button on the side of the interactive
pen or press the projection surface with your finger (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi) for about 3 seconds, and
select Pointer Options > Pen from the pop-up menu.
Note: This also works in Windows XP Tablet PC Edition.
For more information about these features, see Windows Help.
Parent topic: Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools
Whiteboard Mode
You can use the pens or your finger (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi) to write or draw on the projection surface
just as you would on a chalkboard or dry erase board.
You can also do the following:
• Insert images from a thumbdrive or scanner and resize, rotate, or crop the images
• Insert a background pattern or template, or a variety of shapes
• Save, print, or email your whiteboard pages
Using the Whiteboard Toolbars
The Main Whiteboard Toolbar
Selecting Background Templates
Zooming Images in Whiteboard Mode
Inserting and Working With Images
Using the Shapes Tool
Selecting Line Width and Color
The Bottom Whiteboard Toolbar
Selecting Whiteboard Settings
Inserting a Document or Image From a Scanner
Selecting a Networked Device Source
Saving Pages in Whiteboard Mode
Working With Thumbnail Pages
Printing in Whiteboard Mode
Emailing Your Whiteboard Pages
Sharing the Whiteboard
Parent topic: Using the Interactive Features
187
Using the Whiteboard Toolbars
You can use both pens at the same time in whiteboard mode.
1. Press the Whiteboard button on the remote control or control pad.
You see the whiteboard screen, with the main toolbar and the bottom toolbar:
2. To move the main toolbar to the other side of the screen, select the
arrow.
Note: You can use the pen or your finger (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi) to move the arrow up or down.
3. To add a new page, select the
New page icon on the bottom toolbar.
Your current page appears as a thumbnail image on the bottom toolbar.
4. To close the main toolbar, select the
icon at the bottom of the toolbar.
Note: If you want to hide the toolbar automatically after drawing, select the
the toolbar.
5. To show or hide the bottom toolbar, select one of the
188
arrows.
icon at the bottom of
Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode
The Main Whiteboard Toolbar
The main whiteboard toolbar lets you draw, write, and insert images and backgrounds. The toolbar also
lets you easily switch to PC Free annotation or computer interactive mode.
Switch to PC Free annotation mode
Switch to whiteboard mode
Undo the last annotation
189
Redo the last undo
Select all objects in a rectangular area
Select all objects in a freehand area
Turn the pen into a draggable pointer
Capture the selected area as an image
Insert a .jpg or .png image from a thumbdrive or network folder
Insert a circle, square, triangle, or other shape
Change custom pen color and width
Write or draw free-form lines with custom pen
Change highlighter pen color and width
Write or draw free-form lines with transparent highlighter pen
Black pen (fine point on left, thick on right)
Red pen (fine point on left, thick on right)
190
Blue pen (fine point on left, thick on right)
Eraser (thin width on left, thick on right)
Clear all content on page
Displays the current color and mode for both interactive pens and finger (BrightLink Pro
1430Wi)
Hide the toolbar after each annotation
Close the toolbar
Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode
Related tasks
Inserting and Working With Images
Using the Shapes Tool
Selecting Line Width and Color
Selecting Background Templates
In whiteboard mode, you can insert horizontal lines, a graph-paper grid, or another background template
and place it on your whiteboard pages. You can select from 10 pre-installed patterns or add up to 5
custom templates by accessing the projector through your web browser.
1. In whiteboard mode, select the
Template tool on the bottom toolbar.
You see the available templates.
2. Select one of the template patterns.
3. If you want to use the pattern for all the pages in the current session, select Apply to all pages.
4. To scale the pattern, select the pattern repeatedly to cycle through the different scales.
Note: Not all patterns will scale.
Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode
191
Related references
The Bottom Whiteboard Toolbar
Related tasks
Adding Templates from a Web Browser
Zooming Images in Whiteboard Mode
You can use the pen to zoom in and pan around your enlarged image, then zoom out when you are
done.
1. Select the
Zoom tool on the bottom toolbar.
2. Do one of the following to adjust the image if necessary:
• Select the plus icon to enlarge the image.
• Select the minus icon to shrink the image.
• Select the x1 icon to return to the original size.
• Press and drag on the screen to pan around the enlarged area.
Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode
Related references
The Bottom Whiteboard Toolbar
Inserting and Working With Images
In whiteboard mode, you can use the
Insert Image tool to insert an image from a thumbdrive or a
network folder. Images can be in .png or .jpg format, with a maximum size of 2048 × 2048 pixels. Once
the image is projected, you can move, resize, rotate, or crop it.
Note: You can also use the
whiteboard mode.
1. Select the
tool on the bottom toolbar to import files (including pdf files) in
Insert Image tool.
2. Select the image you want to add, then select Insert Image.
After a moment, the image appears on the whiteboard page.
192
3. Once you have selected the image, select either the
do any of the following as necessary:
Rectangle Select or
Free Select tool and
• To move the image, touch inside it and drag with the pen.
• To resize the image, touch any corner and drag inward to shrink or outward to enlarge.
• To rotate the image, touch the round icon at the top of the image and drag left or right.
• To crop the image, select and drag the side of the image.
4. The menu in the bottom right corner of the image allows you to:
• Cut: removes the image from the whiteboard. Tap a location on the screen to paste the image
again.
• Copy: touch a location on the screen and paste a copy of the image
• Paste: create a new selected copy of the image. Drag the image to the desired location.
• Auto Crop: removes any black borders around the selected image
• Delete: removes the image from the whiteboard
After you have edited the image, select another tool from the whiteboard toolbar to exit image edit
mode.
Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode
Related references
The Main Whiteboard Toolbar
Using the Shapes Tool
You can add a variety of shapes to your projected image and select the color and line width.
1. Select the
Shapes tool.
2. Select the line width, color, and shape you want to create, or select the
own shape.
3. Drag the pen on the projection surface to draw the shape you want.
Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode
Related references
The Main Whiteboard Toolbar
193
Line tool to define your
Selecting Line Width and Color
You can select the color and line width for both the custom Pen and the Highlighter tools.
1. Select the
icon next to the custom Pen or Highlighter annotation tool.
2. Select the line width and color you want to use for the Pen or Highlighter tools.
3. Use the pen to write or draw on the projection surface.
Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode
Related references
The Main Whiteboard Toolbar
The Bottom Whiteboard Toolbar
The bottom whiteboard toolbar lets you add scanned or imported images, and view, save, print, or email
your pages.
Share the current whiteboard session
Start a new meeting or whiteboard session
Open a .jpg, .png, or .pdf file from a thumbdrive or network folder. When you open a multipage pdf, each page in the document appears on a separate whiteboard page.
Scan and insert an image
Select a background template
Duplicate the current page
194
Delete the current page
Open a new page. The current page appears as a thumbnail on the bottom toolbar.
Display the previous page thumbnail
Display the next page thumbnail
Print one or more pages
Save a page or a series of pages on a thumbdrive or network folder
Email a page or series of pages
Select an input source
Zoom into the whiteboard
Stops projection and mutes audio. Touch the screen again to restore the image and sound.
Split the screen and project two images. When the screen is split, select the tool again to
return to a single image.
195
Display a help screen for the toolbar functions
Show or hide bottom toolbar
Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode
Related tasks
Selecting Background Templates
Zooming Images in Whiteboard Mode
Selecting a Networked Device Source
Saving Pages in Whiteboard Mode
Working With Thumbnail Pages
Printing in Whiteboard Mode
Emailing Your Whiteboard Pages
Starting a Shared Whiteboard Session
Connecting to a Shared Whiteboard from a Projector
Inserting a Document or Image From a Scanner
Related topics
Sharing the Whiteboard
Selecting Whiteboard Settings
Follow the instructions in these sections to select settings for capturing, scanning, saving, printing, and
emailing in whiteboard mode.
Selecting Basic Whiteboard Settings and Policies
Selecting Whiteboard Print Settings
Selecting Settings for Saving Whiteboard Pages
Selecting Settings for Emailing Whiteboard Pages
Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode
Selecting Basic Whiteboard Settings and Policies
You can select the whiteboard features you want to use and control the way whiteboard pages are saved
in the projector.
196
1. Press the Menu button on the remote control.
2. Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
3. Select Whiteboard Settings and press Enter.
4. Select Basic and press Enter.
197
5. Select the following basic options as necessary:
• Administrator Password lets you enter a password up to 16 alphanumeric characters long for
controlling whiteboard settings. This password is also used for network settings.
• Clock Display Settings lets you control the date and time display on the bottom whiteboard
toolbar.
• Keyboard Layout lets you select the onscreen keyboard layout.
• Delete All Internal Data lets you delete data stored in the projector. Use this option if you have
problems with internal storage, or you need to dispose of the projector or have it repaired.
Note: Use the displayed keyboard to enter the password. Press the arrow buttons on the remote
control to highlight characters and press Enter to select them.
6. Select the Policy menu and press Enter.
7. Select the following policy options as necessary:
• Policy Setting options let you disable capturing, printing, scanning, USB storage, network
storage, or emailing from the projector. All features are enabled by default.
• Template Settings lets you control how the user templates can be changed. When Protect User
Templates is set to On, the user templates can only be changed through the web browser
interface. When set to Off, the user templates can be edited in whiteboard mode.
• Internal Storage settings let you control the use of the projector's internal storage. In most cases,
you should leave this setting On, and select Retain for saved data. The Backup Time for Saved
198
Data setting determines how often whiteboard pages are backed up automatically in case of a
power outage.
8. When you finish selecting settings, select Setup Complete and follow the on-screen instructions to
save your settings and exit the menus.
Parent topic: Selecting Whiteboard Settings
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Related tasks
Printing in Whiteboard Mode
Emailing Your Whiteboard Pages
Saving Pages in Whiteboard Mode
Selecting Background Templates
Adding Templates from a Web Browser
Selecting Whiteboard Print Settings
You can select the default settings for printing whiteboard pages from the projector.
1. Press the Menu button on the remote control.
2. Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
3. Select Whiteboard Settings and press Enter.
199
4. Select Print and press Enter.
5. Select the following printing options as necessary:
• Default Printer lets you select either USB or Network for the printer connection. You can change
this setting when you print in whiteboard mode, but not in annotation mode.
Note: Selecting USB will also enable scanning from Epson All-in-One printers.
• Paper Size lets you select either Letter or A4 as the default paper size.
• Network Printer Settings let you enter the print job user name and IP address for a printer
connected to the same network as the projector. Once this is set, you can select Get printer
information to have the projector communicate with the printer and automatically determine the
printer type. You can also select the Printer Type manually.
• Test Print lets you send a test page to the connected printer.
Note: Use the displayed keyboard to enter the IP address if necessary. Press the arrow buttons on
the remote control to highlight numbers and press Enter to select them.
6. When you finish selecting settings, select Setup Complete and follow the on-screen instructions to
save your settings and exit the menus.
Parent topic: Selecting Whiteboard Settings
200
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Supported Printer Types
Related tasks
Connecting a Printer to the Control Pad
Selecting Settings for Saving Whiteboard Pages
You can select the default settings for saving whiteboard pages from the projector.
1. Press the Menu button on the remote control.
2. Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
3. Select Whiteboard Settings and press Enter.
201
4. Select Save and press Enter.
5. Select the following options for saving as necessary:
• Default Save Location lets you select either USB or Network for saving on a USB thumb drive or
network folder. You can change this setting when you save in whiteboard mode, but not in
annotation mode.
• UNC Address (Universal Naming Convention) lets you set a folder and path in the following
format: \\host name\share name. You can use an IP address or a NetBIOS name as the host
name. You can enter up to 63 alphanumeric characters for the address.
When an IP address is set as the host name, the projector communicates with the file sharing
server using the CIFS protocol. If a routing configuration is used for the TCP protocol, the subnet
is skipped and communication is performed outside the subnet.
When a NetBIOS name is set as the host name, the projector communicates with the file sharing
server using the SMB protocol.
Note: The folder must be on a shared network drive. To save to a folder on a different network
segment, use the WINS server setting on the wired or wireless network menu.
202
• User name lets you set the a user name with read/write privileges on the network folder. You can
enter up to 64 alphanumeric characters. You can enter a domain name by adding it before the
user name and separating them with a backslash (domain\username).
• Password lets you enter a password for the user name. You can enter up to 64 alphanumeric
characters. After you enter the password and select Setup complete, the password is hidden.
• Check Connection lets you test the network connection.
Note: Use the displayed keyboard to enter the address, user name, and password if necessary.
Press the arrow buttons on the remote control to highlight numbers and press Enter to select them.
6. When you finish selecting settings, select Setup Complete and follow the on-screen instructions to
save your settings and exit the menus.
Parent topic: Selecting Whiteboard Settings
Selecting Settings for Emailing Whiteboard Pages
You can select the settings for emailing whiteboard pages from the projector.
1. Press the Menu button on the remote control.
2. Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
3. Select Whiteboard Settings and press Enter.
203
4. Select Mail and press Enter.
5. Select the following options for emailing as necessary:
• SMTP Server let you enter the IP address or host name for the mail server. You can enter up to
63 alphanumeric characters. If you specify a host name, you must configure a DNS server.
Note: You cannot use the following IP addresses: 127.x.x.x, 192.0.2.x, or 224.0.0.0 to
255.255.255.255.
• Authentication lets you set the type of authentication expected by the mail server
• Port Number lets you enter a port number for the SMTP server. The default port is 25.
• User name lets you enter a user name for the mail server. You can enter up to 64 alphanumeric
characters.
• Password lets you enter a password for the mail server. You can enter up to 64 alphanumeric
characters.
• From lets you enter the email address to be displayed to the sender. You can enter up to 64
alphanumeric characters.
• Default e-mail address lets you enter an optional address for testing. You can enter up to 64
alphanumeric characters.
204
• Send a test e-mail connects to the SMTP server and sends a test email to the address you set as
the default.
Note: Use the displayed keyboard to enter the addresses. Press the arrow buttons on the remote
control to highlight numbers or characters and press Enter to select them. You cannot use spaces in
the User Name and Password fields. You can not use spaces or the following symbols: " * + , : ; < =
> ? [ ] | in the Reply to and From fields.
6. When you finish selecting settings, select Setup Complete and follow the on-screen instructions to
save your settings and exit the menus.
Parent topic: Selecting Whiteboard Settings
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Related tasks
Selecting Wired Network Settings
Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually
Inserting a Document or Image From a Scanner
You can scan a paper document into a new page in whiteboard mode. Make sure a supported Epson allin-one printer is connected to the control pad (or to your network).
Note: Standalone scanners are not supported.
1. Place your document on the scanner glass or in the automatic document feeder (if available).
Note: You can place up to 10 sheets in the ADF. If you want to scan a longer document, scan the
pages in batches of 10.
2. Select the
Scan tool on the bottom toolbar.
205
You see the Scan screen:
3. Select the following settings:
• Select Color or Monochrome
• Select the orientation for the scanned document.
• Under ADF, select On if you placed your document in the automatic document feeder.
4. Select Advanced to access additional options.
5. Select Scan on the Scan screen.
After a moment, you see your document or image on the screen.
Note: Multi-page documents appear on multiple whiteboard pages.
Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode
Related references
The Bottom Whiteboard Toolbar
Selecting a Networked Device Source
You can project an image from up to 50 devices connected to the projector via a network. You can select
the image source from computers running EasyMP Multi PC Projection, and smartphones or tablets
running Epson iProjection.
206
1. Select the
Source Select icon on the projector control toolbar.
An image source list appears.
2. Select Participant List.
You see a list of available devices. The icon next to a user name indicates the currently selected
source.
207
3. Select the user name for the device from which you want to project.
Note: Select Refresh to update the user list.
4. Select Return.
You see the screen image from the selected device.
Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode
Related references
The Bottom Whiteboard Toolbar
Saving Pages in Whiteboard Mode
You can save your pages as .png, .ewf, or .pdf files and select the location (network folder or
thumbdrive) where you want to store your files.
1. Press the Save button on the control pad or remote control, or select the
bottom toolbar.
2. Select the location where you want to save your file, then select OK.
You see a screen like the following:
3. To enter a file name, select the File Name text box.
The on-screen keyboard appears.
4. Use the keyboard to enter a file name, then select OK.
208
Save tool on the
5. Select the location where you want to save the file by selecting the Location field. Choose either a
USB or Network location and navigate to the target folder, then select OK.
6. If sharing the whiteboard, select Distribute to all participants to temporarily save the file and make
it available for download through a web browser. After the file is downloaded, it is erased.
7. Select the format for saving. If you choose PDF or EWF (Epson Whiteboard Format), you can
encrypt the file and add a password. If you choose EWF, you can reopen the file later and continue
editing.
8. Select one of the following under Range:
• All to save all the pages in the current whiteboard session (available for PDF or EWF format only)
• Current to save only the current whiteboard page
• Selection if you want to save a range of pages. Tap the numbers in the boxes to select the range
of pages (available for PDF or EWF format only).
9. When you are ready, select Save.
Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode
Related references
The Bottom Whiteboard Toolbar
Working With Thumbnail Pages
Thumbnail pages are displayed on the bottom toolbar in whiteboard mode. You can scroll through your
pages with the pen or your finger (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi), select a page to display at full size, and copy
or delete individual pages. The 5 rectangles in the center of the bottom toolbar shown here are thumbnail
pages:
1. To display a page at full size, select its thumbnail.
2. To scroll through the thumbnail pages, select
the next page.
209
to move to the previous page or
to move to
3. Do any of the following as necessary:
• To add a new page, select the
New page icon. A blank page opens, and this page appears
as the current thumbnail on the bottom toolbar.
• To duplicate the current page, select the
page displayed.
• To delete the current page, select the
icon. The duplicate page appears after the last
Delete icon.
• To change the order of the pages, select and hold a thumbnail for three seconds, then drag the
thumbnail to the new location.
Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode
Related references
The Bottom Whiteboard Toolbar
Printing in Whiteboard Mode
You can print your pages directly from the projector to a supported printer (USB or networked). You can
also select settings for your printed pages, including page numbers, time and date, and collation of
multiple copies.
Make sure your printer meets the control command requirements for printing from the projector.
1. Press the Print button on the control pad or remote control, or select the
bottom toolbar.
Print tool on the
2. Select the number of copies and whether you want to print in color or black only (monochrome).
3. Select one of the following under Range:
• All to print all the pages in the current whiteboard session
• Current to print only the current whiteboard page
• Selection if you want to print selected pages. Tap the numbers in the boxes to select the range of
pages.
4. To make additional settings, select Advanced.
210
You see a screen like the following:
5. Select any of the following settings:
• Printer to choose between a USB and Network printer connection
• Paper Size to choose the size paper loaded in the printer (Letter or A4)
• Pages per sheet to print multiple reduced pages on one sheet of paper
• Page Border to add a border around each page
• Page Number to print the page number on each page
• Date & Time to print the time and date stamp on each page
• Collate to collate pages when printing multiple copies
• Duplex Printing to print on both sides of the paper
6. When you are ready, select Print.
211
Your page or pages are printed.
Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode
Related references
The Bottom Whiteboard Toolbar
Emailing Your Whiteboard Pages
If your projector is set up on your network, you can email your pages directly from the projector.
Note: Mail server settings must be configured before you can email from the projector. Use the
Whiteboard Settings function on the projector's Extended menu to configure email options.
1. Select the
Email tool on the bottom toolbar.
You see a screen like the following:
2. To enter the email address for the recipient, tap the E-mail Address text box.
The on-screen keyboard appears.
3. Use the keyboard to enter the email address and select OK.
4. Select the plus icon to add another email address. You can send email to 10 addresses.
Note: If you imported an address book, you can select the address book icon to add up to 10
addresses.
212
5. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the subject that you want to appear on the Subject line.
6. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter a file name for the attachment.
7. Select the file format for emailing. If you choose PDF or EWF (Epson Whiteboard Format), you can
encrypt the file and add a password.
8. Select any of the following under Range:
• All to send all the pages in the current whiteboard session (available for PDF or EWF format only)
• Current to send only the current whiteboard page
• Selection if you want to send a range of pages (available for PDF or EWF format only). Tap the
numbers in the boxes to select the range of pages.
9. When you are ready, select Send.
Your page or pages are sent.
Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode
Related references
The Bottom Whiteboard Toolbar
Related tasks
Selecting Settings for Emailing Whiteboard Pages
Creating an Address Book
Sharing the Whiteboard
Follow the instructions in these sections to share the whiteboard screen with other projectors, devices,
and computers.
Starting a Shared Whiteboard Session
Connecting to a Shared Whiteboard from a Computer or Other Device
Supported Web Browsers for Sharing a Whiteboard
Web Browser Toolbars
Connecting to a Shared Whiteboard from a Projector
Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode
Related references
The Bottom Whiteboard Toolbar
213
Starting a Shared Whiteboard Session
You can share the whiteboard with up to 15 devices on the same network SSID, including other
projectors that support whiteboard sharing, computers, and other devices.
Note: In order to share the whiteboard, the projector must be set up on a network, and your network
administrator must have opened TCP port 80. If using SSL, also open port 443.
1. Press the Whiteboard button on the remote control or control pad, or select the
on the toolbar.
The projector displays the whiteboard.
2. Select the
share icon on the bottom toolbar.
A dialog is displayed.
3. Select Start sharing with this whiteboard.
You see a dialog displaying the PIN code.
214
whiteboard icon
4. When connecting to the shared whiteboard, users must enter the PIN code. If you want to set your
own PIN code, select the PIN code field and enter a new 7-digit code.
Note: After you share the whiteboard, you cannot change the PIN code unless you restart the
whiteboard sharing session.
5. Select the Start button.
6. To set editing permissions for connected users, select the
share icon on the bottom toolbar again.
You see the Shared Whiteboard dialog.
7. Select one of the following as the Share Configuration setting to permit access to features by
devices connecting to the whiteboard:
• Presentation: Connected devices can view and save the whiteboard screen.
• Discussion: Connected devices can draw on the shared screen.
• Collaboration: Connected devices can access all available features except creating a new
meeting.
Note: The projector displays connection information about the shared whiteboard under Network
information.
215
8. Select Stop sharing this whiteboard to end the whiteboard sharing session.
9. Select Close.
Parent topic: Sharing the Whiteboard
Related references
The Bottom Whiteboard Toolbar
Related tasks
Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually
Selecting Wired Network Settings
Connecting to a Shared Whiteboard from a Computer or Other Device
You can connect to a shared whiteboard from a computer or device on the same network using a web
browser. You can view, save, and draw on the shared whiteboard from your connected computer or
device.
Note: Select the share icon on the bottom toolbar of the whiteboard to display the IP address and PIN
code for the shared whiteboard.
1. On the computer or other device, enter the whiteboard IP address into a web browser in this format:
<projector_ip_address>/wb.
You see a prompt to enter a PIN code.
2. Enter the PIN code and select Connect.
You see the shared whiteboard content and toolbar on your computer or device.
Parent topic: Sharing the Whiteboard
Supported Web Browsers for Sharing a Whiteboard
You can connect to a shared whiteboard using the web browsers described here.
Operating
system
Browser version
Screen resolution of connected device or
computer
Windows
Internet Explorer 8/9/10/11*
Smaller than XGA
OS X
Safari 5/6/7
Up to 1280 × 800
iOS
iOS 6.0 or later
Up to 1024 × 768
216
Operating
system
Browser version
Screen resolution of connected device or
computer
Android
Android OS 4.0 or later standard
browser
Up to 1024 × 768 (4:3 aspect ratio)
Up to 1280 × 600 (16:9 aspect ratio)
Up to 1280 × 720 (16:10 aspect ratio)
* Internet Explorer 8 and 9 require an SSL connection
Parent topic: Sharing the Whiteboard
Web Browser Toolbars
When connected through a web browser, the whiteboard toolbars allow you to interact with the shared
whiteboard. The available tools depend on the Share Configuration setting you selected.
Tool icon
Description
Saves the whiteboard screen as a PDF or PNG file depending on the whiteboard
settings; available only when you select Distribute to the participants when saving to
the connected projector
Displays the pointer on the whiteboard screen and all connected devices
Adjusts the view of the display in the web browser window
Displays the entire whiteboard
Selects a pen for drawing
217
Tool icon
Description
Selects a translucent highlighter pen for drawing
Selects a shape to place on the screen
Selects the eraser tool so you can click on content and select OK to delete it; you
cannot delete partially drawn content
Selects an object or image
Selects the line thickness for the current pen or shape
Selects the color of the selected pen or shape
Loads an image on the whiteboard and resizes it if it is larger than the whiteboard*
Selects a background for the whiteboard page
Control which whiteboard page is displayed on the shared whiteboard
On: Synchronizes the page with the connected whiteboard. When you edit the page,
the change is reflected on the shared whiteboard.
Off: Displays a page that differs from the connected whiteboard. You can only modify
pages that are displayed on the shared whiteboard.
Displays the page number of the edited pages and arrows for moving between them
218
Tool icon
Description
Creates a new whiteboard page
* Images must be JPG or PNG, with a resolution up to 2048 × 2048.
Parent topic: Sharing the Whiteboard
Connecting to a Shared Whiteboard from a Projector
You can connect another projector on the same network to a projector that is sharing its whiteboard.
1. Press the Whiteboard button on the remote control or control pad, or select the
on the toolbar.
The projector displays the whiteboard.
2. Press the
share icon on the bottom toolbar.
The projector displays the Shared Whiteboard dialog.
3. Select Connect to the shared whiteboard.
The projector displays the Shared Whiteboard dialog.
219
whiteboard icon
4. Enter the IP address and PIN code for the projector you want to connect to.
Note: To display the addresses for the last five projector connections, select the arrow icon next to
the address field.
5. Press the Connect button.
Both projectors display the shared whiteboard screen.
To disconnect from the shared whiteboard, select the
Disconnect.
share icon on the bottom toolbar and select
Parent topic: Sharing the Whiteboard
Related references
The Bottom Whiteboard Toolbar
Annotation Mode (PC Free)
Annotation mode lets you project from a computer, tablet, video device, or other source and add notes to
your projected content. You can easily switch between sources and capture, save, or print the images
with annotations. You can also split the screen to annotate on two images at the same time.
Drawing on a Projected Image (Annotation Mode)
Using the Annotation Toolbars
The Main Annotation Toolbar
Zooming Images in Annotation Mode
The Bottom Annotation Toolbar
Printing in Annotation Mode
Saving Images in Annotation Mode
Parent topic: Using the Interactive Features
Drawing on a Projected Image (Annotation Mode)
You can project from a computer, tablet, video device, or other source and add notes to your projected
content using the interactive pens or your finger (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi). You can use one pen, both
pens at the same time, or a combination of pens and finger touch (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi).
1. Project an image from a connected device.
2. Hover near or tap the board or projected image with the interactive pen or your finger (BrightLink Pro
1430Wi). Tap the
annotation icon on the toolbar.
220
You see the main toolbar on the side and the projection control toolbar on the bottom of the
projected image.
3. To move the main toolbar to the other side of the screen, tap the
the screen.
arrow on the opposite side of
Note: You can use the pen or your finger (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi) to move the arrow icon up or
down to reposition the toolbar.
4. To switch to one of the other interactive modes, do one of the following:
• To switch to whiteboard mode, select the
Whiteboard tool.
• To switch to PC Interactive mode, select
, then select
.
Note: You can also press the Pen Mode button on the remote control to switch between modes.
5. To close the main toolbar, select the
icon at the bottom of the toolbar.
Note: If you want to hide the toolbar automatically after drawing, select the
the toolbar.
221
icon at the bottom of
6. To show or hide the projection control toolbar, select the
arrow.
Parent topic: Annotation Mode (PC Free)
Related references
The Main Annotation Toolbar
The Bottom Annotation Toolbar
Related tasks
Inserting a Document or Image From a Scanner
Inserting and Working With Images
Using the Annotation Toolbars
You can use both pens at the same time in annotation mode.
1. Project an image from a connected device.
2. Turn on one of the pens and hover near or tap the projected image.
You see the main toolbar and the bottom toolbar on the projected image, for example:
222
3. To move the main toolbar to the other side of the screen, select the
arrow.
Note: You can use the pen to move the arrow icon up or down.
4. To switch to one of the other modes, do one of the following:
• To switch to whiteboard mode, select the
• To switch to computer interactive mode, select
5. To close the main toolbar, select the
Whiteboard tool.
, then select
.
icon at the bottom of the toolbar.
Note: If you want to hide the toolbar automatically after drawing, select the
the toolbar.
6. To show or hide the bottom toolbar, select the
Parent topic: Annotation Mode (PC Free)
Related concepts
Whiteboard Mode
Using BrightLink With a Computer
Annotation Mode (PC Free)
223
arrow.
icon at the bottom of
The Main Annotation Toolbar
The main annotation toolbar lets you draw and write on your projected image. The toolbar also lets you
easily switch to whiteboard or computer interactive mode.
Switch to annotation mode (PC free annotation)
Switch to whiteboard mode
Undo the last annotation
224
Redo the last undo
Change custom pen color and width
Write or draw free-form lines with custom pen
Change highlighter pen color
Write or draw free-form lines with transparent highlighter pen
Black pen (fine point on left, thick on right)
Red pen (fine point on left, thick on right)
Blue pen (fine point on left, thick on right)
Eraser (thin width on left, thick on right)
Clear all annotations
Hide the toolbar after each annotation
Close the toolbar
Switch modes. Select
interactive). Select
then
then
to switch to computer interactive mode (PC
to switch back to annotation mode (PC free annotation).
Parent topic: Annotation Mode (PC Free)
225
Zooming Images in Annotation Mode
You can use the pen to zoom in on a portion of your image, the same as you can using the E-Zoom
button on the remote control.
1. Select the
Zoom tool.
2. Do one of the following to adjust the image if necessary:
• Press and drag on the screen to pan around the enlarged area.
• Select the plus icon to enlarge the image.
• Select the minus icon to shrink the image.
• Select the x1 icon to return to the original size.
Parent topic: Annotation Mode (PC Free)
The Bottom Annotation Toolbar
The bottom annotation toolbar lets you split the screen and capture, print, or save your images.
Capture the projected image. Switch to whiteboard mode to paste the image onto a new
page.
Print the projected image
Save the projected image in .png format
Select an input source
Zoom into the whiteboard
226
Stops projection and mutes audio. Touch the screen again to restore the image and sound.
Pauses video.
Split the screen and project two images. When the screen is split, select the tool again to
return to a single image.
Show or hide bottom toolbar
Parent topic: Annotation Mode (PC Free)
Related tasks
Printing in Annotation Mode
Saving Images in Annotation Mode
Printing in Annotation Mode
You can print the projected image directly from the projector to a supported printer (USB or networked).
Make sure your printer meets the control command requirements for printing from the projector.
1. Press the Print button on the control pad or remote control, or select the
bottom annotation toolbar.
Print tool on the
2. Select the number of copies you want.
3. When you are ready, select Print.
Your page is printed on the default printer set up in the Print menu under the Whiteboard Settings
menu.
Parent topic: Annotation Mode (PC Free)
Related tasks
Selecting Whiteboard Print Settings
227
Saving Images in Annotation Mode
You can save your images as .png files in the default location set in the projector's menu system.
1. Press the Save button on the control pad or remote control, or select the
bottom annotation toolbar.
Save tool on the
You see a confirmation message.
2. Select Yes.
Your image is named and saved automatically.
Parent topic: Annotation Mode (PC Free)
Related tasks
Selecting Settings for Saving Whiteboard Pages
Splitting the Screen
You can split the screen and project from two sources at the same time. You can annotate and interact
with both sources.
1. Press the Split button on the remote control or select the
Split tool on the bottom toolbar.
The current image is reduced and appears on the left side of the projection surface.
2. Press the
Source Select icon on the bottom toolbar.
228
You see a screen like this:
3. Select the two sources you want to display. Not all combinations of sources are valid.
If you want to write on a blank screen, select any unused source. Unused sources display the color
selected in the Display Background setting. The Logo option will display a blue background.
Note: You can also press the Menu button on the remote control and select the Source option to
select the two sources.
4. Press the Switch Source button to display the two sources.
5. Do any of the following as necessary:
• To change to a different source at any time, press the Menu button on the remote control and
select Source, or press the Select Source icon on the bottom toolbar.
• To annotate on the right screen, press the Menu button on the remote control, select Target Pen
Mode, and select Screen Right. Set the Pen Mode setting to PC Free Annotation.
229
• To use PC interactive mode on the right screen, press the Menu button on the remote control,
select Target Pen Mode, and select Screen Right. Set the Pen Mode setting to PC Interactive.
Note: If you select Video, USB1, or USB2 as a source, you cannot use PC interactive mode.
• To reverse the left and right images, press the Menu button on the remote control and select
Swap Screens.
• To make one image larger, press the Menu button on the remote control, select Screen Size, and
select Larger Left or Larger Right.
6. To return to displaying one image, press the Esc button on the remote control, or press the
Screen icon on the bottom toolbar.
Note: The following operations cannot be performed during split screen projection:
• Menu settings
• E-Zoom
• Switching aspect mode
• Operations made by the User button on the remote control
• Auto Iris
• Light Optimizer
• Image Processing
• Freeze (if one screen is displaying the whiteboard)
Parent topic: Using the Interactive Features
230
Split
Adjusting the Menu Settings
Follow the instructions in these sections to access the projector menu system and change projector
settings.
Using the Projector's Menus
Image Quality Settings - Image Menu
Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu
Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu
Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu
Projector Information Display - Info Menu
Projector Reset Options - Reset Menu
Using the Projector's Menus
You can use the projector's menus to adjust the settings that control how your projector works. The
projector displays the menus on the screen.
231
1. Press the Menu button on the control panel or remote control.
You see the menu screen displaying the Image menu settings.
232
2. Press the up or down arrow buttons to move through the menus listed on the left. The settings for
each menu are displayed on the right.
Note: The available settings depend on the current input source.
3. To change settings in the displayed menu, press Enter.
4. Press the up or down arrow button to move through the settings.
5. Change the settings using the buttons listed on the bottom of the menu screens.
6. To return all the menu settings to their default values, select Reset.
7. When you finish changing settings on a menu, press Esc.
8. Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.
Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings
Related references
Image Quality Settings - Image Menu
Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu
Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu
Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu
Projector Information Display - Info Menu
Projector Reset Options - Reset Menu
233
Image Quality Settings - Image Menu
Settings on the Image menu let you adjust the quality of your image for the input source you are currently
using. The available settings depend on the currently selected input source.
To change settings for an input source, make sure the source is connected and select that source.
Setting
Options
Description
Color Mode
See the list of available Color
Modes
Adjusts the vividness of image
colors for various image types
and environments
Brightness
Varying levels available
Lightens or darkens the overall
image
Contrast
Varying levels available
Adjusts the difference between
light and dark areas of the image
Color Saturation
Varying levels available
Adjusts the intensity of the image
colors
Tint
Varying levels available
Adjusts the balance of green to
magenta tones in the image
Sharpness
Varying levels available
Adjusts the sharpness or
softness of image details
234
Setting
Options
Color Temp. (color temperature) High
Medium
Description
Sets the overall color tone; High
tints the image blue and Low
tints the image red
Low
Advanced
Various options available
Adjusts the gamma levels and
intensity of individual hues in the
image
Auto Iris
Off
Adjusts the projected luminance
based on the image brightness
when certain Color Modes are
selected; High Speed sets faster
luminance correction for fastmoving images
Normal
High Speed
Note: The Brightness setting does not affect lamp brightness. To change the lamp brightness mode,
use the Power Consumption setting.
Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings
Related references
Available Color Modes
Related tasks
Turning On Auto Iris
Changing the Color Mode
235
Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu
Normally the projector detects and optimizes the input signal settings automatically. If you need to
customize the settings, you can use the Signal menu. The available settings depend on the currently
selected input source.
Note: You can restore the default settings of the Position, Tracking, and Sync settings by pressing the
Auto button on the remote control.
To change settings for an input source, make sure the source is connected and select that source.
Setting
Options
Description
Auto Setup
On
Automatically optimizes computer
image quality (when On)
Off
Resolution
Auto
Sets the input signal resolution if
not detected automatically using
the Auto option
Wide
Normal
Tracking
Varying levels available
236
Adjusts signal to eliminate vertical
stripes in computer images
Setting
Options
Description
Sync.
Varying levels available
Adjusts signal to eliminate
fuzziness or flickering in
computer images
Position
Up, down, left, right
Adjusts the image location on the
screen
Progressive
Off
Sets whether to convert
interlaced-to-progressive signals
for certain video image types
Video
Film/Auto
Off: for fast-moving video images
Video: for most video images
Film/Auto: for movies, computer
graphics, and animation
Noise Reduction
Off
Reduces flickering in analog
images in two levels
NR1
NR2
HDMI Video Range
Auto
Sets the video range to match the
setting of the device connected to
the HDMI input port
Normal
Expanded
Auto: detects the video range
automatically
Normal: normally for images from
a device other than a computer;
can also be selected if the black
areas of the image are too bright
Expanded: normally for images
from a computer; can also be
selected if the image is too dark
237
Setting
Options
Description
Input Signal
Auto
Specifies the signal type from
input sources connected to
computer ports
RGB
Component
Auto: detects signals
automatically
RGB: corrects color for
computer/RGB video inputs
Component: corrects color for
component video inputs
Video Signal
Auto
Various video standards
Specifies the signal type from the
input sources connected to the
video ports
Auto: detects signals
automatically
Aspect
See the list of available aspect
ratios
Sets the aspect ratio (width-toheight ratio) for the selected input
source
Overscan
Auto
Changes the projected image
ratio to make the edges visible by
a selectable percentage or
automatically
Off
4%
8%
Image Processing
Fine
Adjusts image processing
speed/quality
Fast
Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings
Related concepts
Image Aspect Ratio
Related references
Available Image Aspect Ratios
Related tasks
Changing the Image Aspect Ratio
238
Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu
Options on the Settings menu let you customize various projector features.
Setting
Options
Description
Keystone
H/V Keystone
Adjusts image shape to
rectangular (horizontally and
vertically)
Quick Corner
H/V Keystone: lets you manually
correct horizontal and vertical
sides
Quick Corner: select to correct
image shape and alignment
using an on-screen display
Split Screen
–
Turns split screen on or off
Zoom
Varying levels available
Adjusts the size of the projected
image
Image Shift
Varying positions available
Adjusts the position of the
projected image
239
Setting
Options
Description
Control Panel Lock
Full Lock
Controls projector button locking
to secure the projector
Partial Lock
Full Lock: locks all buttons
Off
Partial Lock: locks all buttons
except the power button
Off: no buttons locked
Pointer Shape
Three shapes available
Changes the shape of the remote
control pointer feature
Volume
Varying levels available
Adjusts the volume of projector’s
speaker system or external
speakers
Remote Receiver
Front/Rear
Limits reception of remote control
signals by the selected receiver;
Off turns off all receivers
Front
Rear
Off
User Button
Power Consumption
Info
Progressive
Closed Caption
Test Pattern
Resolution
Pattern Display
Auto Calibration
240
Assigns a menu option to the
User button on the remote
control for one-touch access
Setting
Options
Description
Pattern
Pattern Display
Selects various pattern display
options
Pattern Type
User Pattern
Test Pattern
Pattern Display: lets you display
the selected pattern type on the
screen to aid in presentation
Pattern Type: selects the type of
grid or line pattern to display
User Pattern: captures a
projected screen and saves it as
a pattern for display
Test Pattern: displays a test
pattern to assist in focusing and
zooming the image and
correcting image shape
Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings
Related tasks
Correcting Image Shape with the Keystone Buttons
Correcting Image Shape with Quick Corner
Adjusting the Image Position
Locking the Projector's Buttons
Unlocking the Projector's Buttons
241
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Settings on the Extended menu let you customize various projector setup features that control its
operation.
Easy Interactive Function Settings
Setting
Options
Description
General Easy Interactive Function settings
Auto Calibration
—
Start calibration for the
interactive pens
Manual Calibration
242
Setting
Options
Description
Touch Unit Setup
Installation Pattern
Select settings for the Touch Unit
(BrightLink Pro 1430Wi)
Power
Installation Pattern: displays
reference points to help you
determine the installation position
of the Touch Unit
Angle Adjustment
Touch Calibration
Power: turns on the Touch Unit
power
Angle Adjustment: performs
angle adjustment for laser
diffusion
Touch Calibration: performs
calibration for finger touch
operations
Pen Mode
PC Free Annotation
PC Interactive
Selects the mode for the
interactive pens
PC Free Annotation: draws on
the projected screen without
software or PC required
PC Interactive: operates a
mouse or interactive device from
the projected screen using the
interactive pen or your finger
(BrightLink Pro 1430Wi)
Hovering
On
Turns the pen hovering feature
on and off; when set to On, the
pointer follows the pen tip as you
hover it over the screen and
move it around
Off
243
Setting
Options
Description
Advanced
Distance of Projectors
Selects various settings for
interactive features
Sync of Projectors
Wired Sync Mode
Pen Button Function
Confirm Clear Screen
Color Palette
Distance of Projectors, Sync of
Projectors, and Wired Sync
Mode: let you adjust features for
using multiple projectors of the
same model in the same room
Pen Button Function: sets the
pen to act as an eraser
Confirm Clear Screen: lets you
display a confirmation screen
before clearing all of the content
Color Palette: lets you choose a
different palette if certain colors
are difficult to see
PC Interactive Easy Interactive Function settings
Pen Operation Mode
Two Users/Mouse
(BrightLink Pro 1420Wi)
One User/Mouse
One User/Pen
Sets the operation mode and
number of users for the
interactive pen
Two Users/Mouse or One
User/Mouse: lets you use the
interactive pen as a mouse
One User/Pen: lets you use the
Windows pen and ink features
Pen Operation Mode
Mode 1
(BrightLink Pro 1430Wi)
Mode 2
Mode 3
Selects the operating system
version for pen operations
Mode 1: Windows XP or earlier
Mode 2: OS X, or Windows Vista
or later
Mode 3 : Linux
244
Setting
Options
Description
Enable Right Click
On
Lets you use a long pen press or
finger press (BrightLink Pro
1430Wi) as a right-click operation
when using mouse mode
Off
Advanced
Pen Tip Button
Auto Adjust Pen Area
Manual Adj. Pen Area
Select pen operation and
adjustment options
Pen Tip Button: assign either
Right Click or Left Click to the
pen tip button
Select either Auto Adjust Pen
Area or Manual Adj. Pen Area
as the pen area adjustment
option
Other Extended Settings
Setting
Options
Description
Whiteboard Settings
Basic
Displays whiteboard setting
menus
Policy
Print
Save
Mail
Reset
245
Setting
Options
Description
Display
Messages
Selects various display options
Display Background
Messages: controls whether
messages are displayed on the
screen
Startup Screen
A/V Mute
Toolbars
Pen Mode Icon
Projector Control
Display Background: selects
the screen color or logo to
display when no signal is
received
Startup Screen: controls
whether a special screen
appears when the projector starts
up
A/V Mute: selects the screen
color or logo to display when A/V
Mute is turned on
Toolbar Tab: controls whether
the tab is always displayed in
annotation mode
Pen Mode Icon: controls the
display and position of the pen
icon in interactive computer
mode
Projector Control: controls
where the projector control
toolbar is displayed on the screen
Closed Caption
Off
Controls use of closed captions
and selects the closed caption
type
CC1
CC2
User's Logo
–
Creates a screen that the
projector displays to identify itself
and enhance security
246
Setting
Options
Description
Projection
Front
Selects the way the projector
faces the screen so the image is
oriented correctly
Front/Upside Down
Rear
Rear Upside Down
Operation
Direct Power On
Selects various operation options
High Altitude Mode
Direct Power On: lets you turn
on the projector without pressing
the power button
Startup Source Search
Auto Power On
High Altitude Mode: regulates
the projector’s operating
temperature at altitudes above
4921 feet (1500 m)
Startup Source Search:
automatically detects the image
signal that is input when the
projector is turned on
Auto Power On: lets you turn on
the projector by turning on a
computer connected to the
Computer port
247
Setting
Options
Description
A/V Settings
A/V Output
Selects the following when the
projector is in standby mode
(turned off):
Audio Output
HDMI1 Audio Output
HDMI2 Audio Output
A/V Output: The Always On
setting lets the projector output
audio and video signals even
while it is standby mode.
Available only when Standby
Mode is set to Communication
On
Audio Output: Selects the audio
input port when projecting
images from the Computer,
Video, and USB-A ports.
HDMI1 Audio Output and
HDMI2 Audio Output: Selects
which Audio port provides audio
output when viewing images from
the HDMI 1/MHL and HDMI 2
ports on the projector.
248
Setting
Options
Description
USB Type B
Easy Interactive Function
Selects what happens when you
connect your computer to the
projector's USB-B port
USB Display/Easy Interactive
Function
Wireless Mouse/USB Display
Easy Interactive Function: lets
you use the interactive pens or
your finger (BrightLink Pro
1430Wi) with your computer
USB Display/Easy Interactive
Function: lets you display your
computer's image through the
USB port and use the interactive
pens or your finger (BrightLink
Pro 1430Wi) with your computer
Wireless Mouse/USB Display:
lets you use the wireless mouse
feature and display your
computer's image through the
USB port (interactivity not
available)
Time/Schedule Settings
Date & Time
Schedule
Sets the projector's date and time
and scheduled projector actions
Schedule Reset
Setup Complete
Language
Various languages available
Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings
Related concepts
Projector Connections
Projection Modes
Related references
Projector Setup and Installation Options
249
Selects the language for
projector menu and message
displays (not changed by Reset
option)
Related tasks
Connecting to a Computer for Pen Use or USB Mouse Control
Turning On the Projector
Selecting the Language for the Projector Menus
Changing the Projection Mode Using the Menus
Saving a Scheduled Event
Viewing Scheduled Events
Editing Scheduled Events
Selecting Basic Whiteboard Settings and Policies
Selecting Whiteboard Print Settings
Selecting Settings for Saving Whiteboard Pages
Selecting Settings for Emailing Whiteboard Pages
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu
Settings on the Network menu let you view network information and set up the projector for monitoring
and control over a network.
250
Setting
Options
Description
Net. Info - Wireless LAN
Connection mode
Displays wireless network status
and details
Wireless LAN Sys.
Antenna level
Projector Name
SSID
DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
MAC Address
Net. Info - Wired LAN
Projector Name
DHCP
Displays wired network status
and details
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
MAC Address
Network Configuration
Accesses additional network
menus
Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings
Related references
Wireless LAN Menu Settings
Related tasks
Selecting Wired Network Settings
Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually
251
Configures your network settings
Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu
Settings on the ECO menu let you customize projector functions to save power. When you select a
power-saving setting, a leaf icon appears next to the menu item.
Setting
Options
Description
Power Consumption
Auto
Selects the brightness mode of
the projector lamp
Normal
Auto: sets the projector to sense
the optimum lamp brightness and
adjust the lamp brightness
accordingly
ECO
Normal: sets maximum lamp
brightness
ECO: reduces lamp brightness
and fan noise, and saves power
and lamp life
Light Optimizer
On
When Power Consumption is
set to Normal, the lamp
brightness is adjusted based on
the projected image; you can set
this option for each color mode
Off
252
Setting
Options
Description
Sleep Mode
On
Automatically places the
projector in standby mode after
an interval of inactivity
Off
Sleep Mode Timer
1 to 30 minutes
Sets the interval for Sleep Mode
A/V Mute Timer
On
Automatically turns off the
projector after 30 minutes if A/V
Mute is enabled
Off
Standby Mode
Communication On
Communication Off
Enable this setting to allow the
following operations to occur
when the projector is in standby
mode:
• Monitor and control the
projector over a network
• Output audio and video to an
external device (A/V Output
must be set to Always On)
ECO Display
On
Displays a leaf icon in the bottom
left corner of the projected screen
to indicate the power-saving
status when the lamp brightness
changes
Off
Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings
Related references
Projector Lamp Specifications
253
Projector Information Display - Info Menu
You can display information about the projector and input sources by viewing the Info menu. However,
you cannot change any settings in the menu.
Select Version to display the projector's firmware version. Select Projector Info to display the settings
described below.
Note: Available settings depend on the current input source. The lamp usage timer does not register any
hours until you have used the lamp for at least 10 hours.
Information item
Description
Lamp Hours
Displays the number of hours (H) the lamp has been used in
Normal and ECO Power Consumption modes; if the information is
displayed in yellow, obtain a genuine Epson replacement lamp
soon
Source
Displays the name of the port to which the current input source is
connected
Input Signal
Displays the input signal setting of the current input source
Resolution
Displays the resolution of the current input source
Video Signal
Displays the video signal format of the current input source
254
Information item
Description
Refresh Rate
Displays the refresh rate of the current input source
Sync Info
Displays information that may be needed by a service technician
Status
Displays information about projector problems that may be needed
by a service technician
Serial Number
Displays the projector's serial number
Event ID
Displays the Event ID number corresponding to a specific projector
problem; see the list of Event ID codes
Event ID Code List
Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings
Event ID Code List
If the Event ID option on the Info menu displays a code number, check this list of Event ID codes for the
solution to the projector problem associated with the code.
Event ID code
Cause and solution
0432
The EasyMP Network Projection program did not start. Turn the projector off and
then on again.
0435
0434
0482
Unstable network communication. Check the network communication status, wait a
few moments, and try connecting to the network again.
0484
0485
0433
Cannot display the transferred images. Restart the EasyMP Network Projection
program.
0481
Communication with computer was disconnected. Restart the EasyMP Network
Projection program.
0483
The EasyMP Network Projection program quit unexpectedly. Check the network
communication status, then turn the projector off and then on again.
04FE
255
Event ID code
Cause and solution
0479
A projector system error has occurred. Turn the projector off and then on again.
04FF
0891
Cannot find an access point with the same SSID. Set your computer, access point,
and projector to the same SSID.
0892
The WPA/WPA2 authentication type does not match. Make sure the wireless
network security settings are correct.
0893
The WEP/TKIP/AES encryption type does not match. Make sure the wireless
network security settings are correct.
0894
Communication with unauthorized access point was disconnected. Contact your
network administrator.
0898
Failed to acquire DHCP. Make sure the DHCP server is operating correctly. If you
are not using DHCP, turn off the DHCP setting in the Network menus.
0899
A communication error has occurred. Try restarting the EasyMP Network Projection
program and restarting your projector. If that does not solve the problem, contact
Epson for help.
089A
The EAP authentication type does not match the network. Check the wireless LAN
security settings and make sure that the security certificate is installed correctly.
089B
EAP server authentication failed. Check the wireless LAN security settings and
make sure that the security certificate is installed correctly.
089C
EAP client authentication failed. Check the wireless LAN security settings and make
sure that the security certificate is installed correctly.
089D
Key exchange failed. Check the wireless LAN security settings and make sure that
the security certificate is installed correctly.
0B01
The internal storage could not be detected correctly. Select Delete All Internal Data
in the Basic menu under Whiteboard Settings. Turn off the projector and disconnect
the power cord, then reconnect the power cord and turn the projector back on. If that
does not solve the problem, contact Epson for help.
0BFF
An error has occurred in the whiteboard function. Restart the projector.
Parent topic: Projector Information Display - Info Menu
256
Projector Reset Options - Reset Menu
You can reset most of the projector settings to their default values using the Reset All option on the
Reset menu.
You can also reset the projector's lamp usage timer to zero when you replace the lamp using the Reset
Lamp Hours option.
You cannot reset the following settings using the Reset All option:
• Input Signal
• User's Logo
• Language
• Network menu items
• Lamp Hours
• Password
• Zoom
• Image Shift
Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings
257
Maintaining and Transporting the Projector
Follow the instructions in these sections to maintain your projector and transport it from place to place.
Projector Maintenance
Transporting the Projector
Projector Maintenance
Your projector needs little maintenance to keep working at its best.
You may need to clean the projection window and obstacle sensor periodically, and clean the air filter
and air vents to prevent the projector from overheating due to blocked ventilation.
The only parts you should replace are the lamp, air filter, pen batteries and tips, control pad batteries,
and remote control batteries. If any other part needs replacing, contact Epson or an authorized Epson
servicer.
Warning: Before cleaning any part of the projector, turn it off and unplug the power cord. Never open
any cover on the projector, except as specifically explained in this manual. Dangerous electrical voltages
in the projector can injure you severely.
Warning: Do not try to service this product yourself, except as specifically explained in this manual.
Refer all other servicing to qualified servicers.
Cleaning the Projection Window
Cleaning the Obstacle Sensor
Cleaning the Projector Case
Air Filter and Vent Maintenance
Projector Lamp Maintenance
Replacing the Remote Control Batteries
Replacing the Interactive Pen Batteries
Replacing the Interactive Pen Tips
Parent topic: Maintaining and Transporting the Projector
Cleaning the Projection Window
Clean the projection window periodically, or whenever you notice dust or smudges on the surface.
• To remove dust or smudges, gently wipe the projection window with lens-cleaning paper.
258
• To remove stubborn smudges, moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with lens cleaner and gently wipe the
projection window.
Warning: Do not use a lens cleaner that contains flammable gas. The high heat generated by the
projector lamp may cause a fire.
Caution: Do not use canned air, or the gases may leave a flammable residue.
Parent topic: Projector Maintenance
Related tasks
Turning Off the Projector
Cleaning the Obstacle Sensor
Clean the projector's obstacle sensor glass (circled in red) periodically, or if you see a message telling
you to remove any obstacles that are interfering with the projection area.
• To remove dust or smudges, gently wipe the obstacle sensor glass with lens-cleaning paper.
• To remove stubborn smudges, moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with lens cleaner and gently wipe the
obstacle sensor glass.
Warning: Do not use a lens cleaner that contains flammable gas. The high heat generated by the
projector lamp may cause a fire.
259
Caution: Do not use canned air, or the gases may leave a flammable residue.
Parent topic: Projector Maintenance
Related tasks
Turning Off the Projector
Cleaning the Projector Case
Before cleaning the projector case, turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.
• To remove dust or dirt, use a soft, dry, lint-free cloth.
• To remove stubborn dirt, use a soft cloth moistened with water and mild soap. Do not spray liquid
directly on the projector.
Caution: Do not use wax, alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other chemicals to clean the projector
case. These can damage the case. Do not use canned air, or the gases may leave a flammable
residue.
Parent topic: Projector Maintenance
Related tasks
Turning Off the Projector
Air Filter and Vent Maintenance
Regular filter maintenance is important to maintaining your projector. Your Epson projector is designed
with an easily accessible, user-replaceable filter to protect your projector and make regular maintenance
simple. Filter maintenance intervals will depend on the environment.
If regular maintenance is not performed, your Epson projector will notify you when the temperature
inside the projector has reached a high level. Do not wait until this warning appears to maintain your
projector filter as prolonged exposure to high temperatures may reduce the life of your projector or lamp.
Damage due to the failure to properly maintain the projector or its filter may not be covered by the
projector or lamp Limited Warranties.
Cleaning the Air Filter and Vents
Replacing the Air Filter
Parent topic: Projector Maintenance
Cleaning the Air Filter and Vents
Clean the projector's air filter or vents if they get dusty, or if you see a message telling you to clean them.
260
1. Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.
2. Slide the air filter cover latch and open the air filter cover.
261
3. Pull the air filter out of the projector.
4. Vacuum the front of the air filter (the side with the tabs) to remove any remaining dust.
Note: If dust is difficult to remove or the air filter is damaged, replace the air filter.
262
5. Place the air filter back in the projector as shown.
6. Close the air filter cover.
Parent topic: Air Filter and Vent Maintenance
Related tasks
Turning Off the Projector
Replacing the Air Filter
You need to replace the air filter in the following situations:
• After cleaning the air filter, you see a message telling you to clean or replace it
• The air filter is torn or damaged
You can replace the air filter while the projector is mounted on the wall or ceiling.
1. Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.
263
2. Slide the air filter cover latch and open the air filter cover.
264
3. Pull the air filter out of the projector.
Note: Air filters contain polypropylene. Dispose of used air filters according to local regulations.
265
4. Place the new air filter in the projector as shown.
5. Close the air filter cover.
Parent topic: Air Filter and Vent Maintenance
Related tasks
Turning Off the Projector
Projector Lamp Maintenance
The projector keeps track of the number of hours the lamp is used and displays this information in the
projector's menu system.
Replace the lamp as soon as possible when the following occurs:
• The projected image gets darker or starts to deteriorate
• A message appears when you turn on the projector telling you to replace the lamp
• The projector's lamp light is flashing orange and its power light is flashing blue
Replacing the Lamp
Resetting the Lamp Timer
266
Parent topic: Projector Maintenance
Replacing the Lamp
Before you replace the lamp, let the projector cool down for at least one hour so the lamp will not be hot.
Warning: Let the lamp fully cool before replacing it to avoid injury.
You can replace the lamp while the projector is mounted on the wall or ceiling.
1. Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.
2. Allow the projector lamp to cool down for at least one hour.
Warning: If the lamp is broken, glass fragments may be loose inside the lamp chamber. Be careful
removing any broken glass to avoid injury. If the projector is mounted on the wall or ceiling, stand to
the side in case the lamp is broken.
3. Use the screwdriver included with the replacement lamp to loosen the screw securing the lamp
cover.
267
4. Slide off the lamp cover.
5. Loosen the screws securing the lamp to the projector. The screws do not come all the way out.
268
6. Lift up the lamp handle and gently pull the lamp out of the projector.
Note:
The lamp(s) in this product contain mercury. Please consult your state and local
regulations regarding disposal or recycling. Do not put in the trash.
7. Gently insert the new lamp into the projector along the guide rail. If it does not fit easily, make sure it
is facing the right way. Press the handle down.
Caution: Do not touch any glass on the lamp assembly to avoid premature lamp failure.
269
8. Tighten the screws to secure the lamp.
9. Replace the lamp cover and tighten the screw to secure it.
Note: Be sure the lamp cover is securely installed or the lamp will not come on.
270
Reset the lamp timer to zero to keep track of the new lamp’s usage.
Parent topic: Projector Lamp Maintenance
Related tasks
Turning Off the Projector
Resetting the Lamp Timer
Resetting the Lamp Timer
You must reset the lamp timer after replacing the projector's lamp to clear the lamp replacement
message and to keep track of lamp usage correctly.
Note: Do not reset the lamp timer if you have not replaced the lamp to avoid inaccurate lamp usage
information.
1. Turn on the projector.
2. Press the Menu button.
3. Select the Reset menu and press Enter.
4. Select Reset Lamp Hours and press Enter.
You see a prompt asking if you want to reset the lamp hours.
5. Select Yes and press Enter.
6. Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.
271
Parent topic: Projector Lamp Maintenance
Replacing the Remote Control Batteries
The remote control uses two AA manganese or alkaline batteries. Replace the batteries as soon as they
run out.
Caution: Use only the type of batteries specified in this manual. Do not install batteries of different types,
or mix new and old batteries.
1. Open the battery cover as shown.
2. Remove the old batteries.
Warning: If the battery fluid has leaked, wipe it away with a soft cloth and avoid getting the fluid on
your hands. If it gets on your hands, wash them immediately to avoid injury.
272
3. Insert the batteries with the + and – ends facing as shown.
4. Close the battery cover and press it down until it clicks into place.
Warning: Dispose of used batteries according to local regulations. Do not expose batteries to heat
or flame. Keep batteries out of the reach of children; they are choking hazards and are very
dangerous if swallowed.
Parent topic: Projector Maintenance
Replacing the Interactive Pen Batteries
Each pen uses one AA alkaline or Sanyo Eneloop rechargeable battery. Replace the battery as soon as
it runs out.
273
When the battery is low, the pen light flashes as you turn on the switch. When the battery runs out, the
pen light goes out.
Caution: Use only the type of batteries specified in this manual.
1. Open the battery cover as shown.
2. Remove the old battery.
Warning: If the battery fluid has leaked, wipe it away with a soft cloth and avoid getting the fluid on
your hands. If it gets on your hands, wash them immediately to avoid injury.
3. Insert the battery with the + and – ends facing as shown.
274
4. Replace the battery cover and press it down until it clicks into place.
Warning: Dispose of used batteries according to local regulations. Do not expose batteries to heat
or flame. Keep batteries out of the reach of children; they are choking hazards and are very
dangerous if swallowed.
Parent topic: Projector Maintenance
Replacing the Interactive Pen Tips
If the pen tips become damaged or no longer work correctly, you can replace them.
1. Twist off the tip of the pen to remove it.
275
2. Twist on the new tip.
Parent topic: Projector Maintenance
Transporting the Projector
The projector contains precision parts, some of which are glass. Follow these guidelines to transport or
ship the projector safely:
• Remove any equipment connected to the projector.
• When transporting the projector a long distance or as checked luggage, pack it in a firm box with
cushioning around it and mark the box "Fragile."
• When shipping the projector for repairs, place it in its original packing materials, if possible, or use
equivalent materials with cushioning around the projector. Mark the box "Fragile."
Note: Epson shall not be liable for any damages incurred during transportation.
Parent topic: Maintaining and Transporting the Projector
276
Solving Problems
Check the solutions in these sections if you have any problems using the projector.
Projection Problem Tips
Projector Light Status
Using the Projector Help Displays
Solving Image or Sound Problems
Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems
Solving Interactive Problems
Solving Network Problems
Where to Get Help
Projection Problem Tips
If the projector is not working properly, try turning it off and unplugging it. Then plug it back in and turn it
on.
If this does not solve the problem, check the following:
• The lights on the projector may indicate what the problem is.
• The solutions in this manual can help you solve many problems.
If none of these solutions help, you can contact Epson for technical support.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Related references
Projector Light Status
277
Projector Light Status
The lights on the projector indicate the projector status and let you know when a problem occurs. Check
the status and color of the lights and look for a solution in the table here.
1
Power light
2
Status light
3
Lamp light
4
Temp (temperature) light
Power light
Status light
Lamp light Temp light
Status and solution
Blue
Blue
Off
Off
Normal operation.
Blue
Flashing blue
Off
Off
Warming up. Wait for an image to
appear.
Shutting down. (When the Status light
stops flashing, you can unplug the
projector.)
278
Power light
Status light
Lamp light Temp light
Status and solution
Blue
Off
Off
Standby or sleep mode.
Off
Network monitoring mode. The
projector is being monitored and
controlled over the network.
Off
Flashing blue
Off
Orange
Projector has overheated and turned
off. Leave it turned off to cool down.
After about five minutes, do the
following:
• Make sure that the vents and air
filter are not clogged with dust or
obstructed by nearby objects.
• Clean or replace the air filter.
• If operating the projector at high
altitude, turn on High Altitude
Mode.
• If the problem persists, unplug the
projector and contact Epson for
help.
Off
Flashing blue
Orange
Off
Lamp has a problem.
• Check to see if the lamp is burned
out, broken, or installed incorrectly.
Reseat or replace the lamp as
necessary.
• Clean or replace the air filter.
• If operating the projector at high
altitude, turn on High Altitude
Mode.
• If the problem persists, unplug the
projector and contact Epson for
help.
Flashing blue
Varies
Flashing
orange
279
Varies
Replace the lamp soon to avoid
damage. Do not continue using the
projector.
Power light
Status light
Lamp light Temp light
Status and solution
Off
Flashing blue
Off
Flashing
orange
A fan or sensor has a problem. Turn
the projector off, unplug it, and
contact Epson for help.
Off
Flashing blue
Flashing
orange
Flashing
orange
Auto Iris error. Turn the projector off,
unplug it, and contact Epson for help.
Off
Flashing blue
Orange
Orange
Power error (ballast). Turn the
projector off, unplug it, and contact
Epson for help.
Obstacle detection error. A message
is displayed: "For safety purposes
remove any obstacles blocking the
lens."
• Remove any obstacles.
• Clean the obstacle sensor.
• If the detection error continues, turn
the projector off, unplug it, and
contact Epson for help.
Off
Flashing blue
Flashing
orange
Off
Internal projector error. Turn the
projector off, unplug it, and contact
Epson for help.
Note: If the lights display a pattern not listed in the table above, turn the projector off, unplug it, and
contact Epson for help.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Using the Projector Help Displays
You can display information to help you solve common problems using the projector's Help system.
1. Turn on the projector.
2. Press the Help button on the projector or the remote control.
You see the Help menu.
280
3. Use the up and down arrow buttons to highlight the problem you want to solve.
Note: You can also display image adjustment recommendations by pressing the left arrow button.
4. Press Enter to view the solutions.
5. When you are finished, do one of the following:
• To select another problem to solve, press Esc.
• To exit the help system, press Help.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Solving Image or Sound Problems
Check the solutions in these sections if you have any problems with projected images or sound.
Solutions When No Image Appears
Solutions When Image is Incorrect Using the USB Display Function
Solutions When "No Signal" Message Appears
Solutions When "Not Supported" Message Appears
Solutions When Only a Partial Image Appears
Solutions When the Image is Not Rectangular
Solutions When the Image Contains Noise or Static
Solutions When the Image is Fuzzy or Blurry
Solutions When the Image Brightness or Colors are Incorrect
Solutions to Sound Problems
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Solutions When No Image Appears
If no image appears, try the following solutions:
• Press the A/V Mute button on the remote control to see if the image was temporarily turned off.
• Make sure all necessary cables are securely connected and the power is on for the projector and
connected video sources.
• Press the projector's power button to wake it from standby or sleep mode. Also see if your connected
computer is in sleep mode or displaying a blank screen saver.
• Check the settings on the Signal menu to make sure they are correct for the current video source.
281
• Adjust the Brightness setting or select the Normal Power Consumption setting.
• Check the Display setting to make sure Messages is set to On.
• If the projector does not respond when you press the control panel buttons, the buttons may be
locked. Unlock the buttons.
• If the projector does not respond when you press buttons on the remote control, make sure the remote
receivers are turned on.
• For images projected with Windows Media Center, reduce the screen size from full screen mode.
• For images projected from applications using Windows DirectX, turn off DirectX functions.
Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems
Related references
Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu
Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu
Related tasks
Unlocking the Projector's Buttons
Selecting an Image Source
Solutions When Image is Incorrect Using the USB Display Function
If no image appears or if the image appears incorrectly using the USB Display function, try the following
solutions:
• Press the Source Search button on the remote control or control pad and select USB Display.
• Make sure the USB Display software has installed correctly. Install it manually if necessary.
• Make sure the USB Type B setting in the Extended menu is set to one of the USB Display options.
• With Mac OS X, select the USB Display icon in the Dock or from the Applications folder.
• Change the computer's resolution to 1280 × 800.
• For images projected with Windows Media Center, reduce the screen size from full screen mode.
• For images projected from applications using Windows DirectX, turn off DirectX functions.
• If the mouse cursor flickers, select Make the movement of the mouse pointer smooth in the Epson
USB Display Settings program on your computer (feature not available with Windows 2000).
• Turn off the Transfer layered window setting in the Epson USB Display Settings program on your
computer.
Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems
282
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Related tasks
Selecting an Image Source
Solutions When "No Signal" Message Appears
If the "No Signal" message appears, try the following solutions:
• Press the Source Search button and wait a few seconds for an image to appear.
• Turn on the connected computer or video source, and press its play button to begin your presentation,
if necessary.
• Check the connection from the projector to your video sources.
• If you are projecting from a laptop computer, make sure it is set up to display on an external monitor.
• If necessary, turn the projector and the connected computer or video source off and then on again.
Displaying From a PC Laptop
Displaying From a Mac Laptop
Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems
Related tasks
Selecting an Image Source
Related topics
Connecting to Computer Sources
Connecting to Video Sources
Displaying From a PC Laptop
If you see the "No Signal" message when you display from a PC laptop, you need to set up the laptop to
display on an external monitor.
1. Hold down the laptop's Fn key and press the key labelled with a monitor icon or CRT/LCD. (See
your laptop manual for details.) Wait a few seconds for an image to appear.
2. To display on both the laptop's monitor and the projector, try pressing the same keys again.
3. If the same image is not displayed by the laptop and projector, check the Windows Display utility to
make sure the external monitor port is enabled and extended desktop mode is disabled. (See your
computer or Windows manual for instructions.)
283
4. If necessary, check your video card settings and set the multiple display option to Mirror or
Duplicate.
Parent topic: Solutions When "No Signal" Message Appears
Displaying From a Mac Laptop
If you see the "No Signal" message when you display from a Mac laptop, you need to set up the laptop
for mirrored display. (See your laptop manual for details.)
1. Open the System Preferences utility and select Displays.
2. Click the Arrangement tab.
3. Select the Mirror Displays checkbox.
Parent topic: Solutions When "No Signal" Message Appears
Solutions When "Not Supported" Message Appears
If the "Not Supported" message appears, try the following solutions:
• Make sure the correct input signal is selected on the Signal menu.
• Make sure the computer's display resolution does not exceed the projector's resolution and frequency
limit. If necessary, select a different display resolution for your computer. (See your computer manual
for details.)
Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems
Related references
Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu
Solutions When Only a Partial Image Appears
If only a partial computer image appears, try the following solutions:
• Press the Auto button on the remote control to optimize the image signal.
• Try adjusting the image position using the Position menu setting.
• Press the Aspect button on the remote control to select a different image aspect ratio.
• If you zoomed into or out of the image using the E-Zoom buttons, press the Esc button until the
projector returns to a full display.
• Check your computer display settings to disable dual display and set the resolution within the
projector's limits. (See your computer manual for details.)
284
• Check the resolution assigned to your presentation files to see if they are created for a different
resolution than you are projecting in. (See your software help for details.)
Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems
Related references
Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu
Related tasks
Changing the Image Aspect Ratio
Zooming Into and Out of Images
Solutions When the Image is Not Rectangular
If the projected image is not evenly rectangular, try the following solutions:
• If the projector is not mounted on the wall or ceiling, place it directly in front of the center of the screen,
facing it squarely, if possible.
• If you adjusted the projector height using the projector feet, press the keystone buttons on the
projector to adjust the image shape. (BrightLink Pro 1420Wi)
• Adjust the Quick Corner or Keystone setting to correct the image shape.
Note: Adjusting Quick Corner and Keystone settings may affect focus and pen calibration.
Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems
Related tasks
Correcting Image Shape with the Keystone Buttons
Correcting Image Shape with Quick Corner
Solutions When the Image Contains Noise or Static
If the projected image seems to contain electronic interference (noise) or static, try the following
solutions:
• Check the cables connecting your computer or video source to the projector. They should be:
• Separated from the power cord to prevent interference
• Securely connected at both ends
• Not connected to an extension cable
• No longer than 10 feet (3 m) for VGA/computer cables or 24 feet (7.3 m) for HDMI cables
285
• Check the settings on the projector's Signal menu to make sure they match the video source.
• Select a computer video resolution and refresh rate that are compatible with the projector.
• Try a different cable.
Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems
Related references
Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu
Supported Video Display Formats
Related topics
Connecting to Computer Sources
Connecting to Video Sources
Solutions When the Image is Fuzzy or Blurry
If the projected image is fuzzy or blurry, try the following solutions:
• Adjust the image focus.
• Check the projector lens cover glass for condensation.
Note: To avoid condensation on the lens after bringing the projector in from a cold environment, let the
projector warm up to room temperature before using it.
• Position the projector close enough to the screen, and directly in front of it.
• Position the projector so the keystone adjustment angle is not so wide that it distorts the image.
• Adjust the Sharpness setting to improve image quality.
• If you are projecting from a computer, press the Auto button on the remote control to automatically
adjust the tracking and sync. If any bands or overall blurriness remain, display a uniformly patterned
image on the screen and manually adjust the Tracking and Sync settings.
• If you are projecting from a computer, use a lower resolution.
Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems
Related references
Image Quality Settings - Image Menu
Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu
Related tasks
Focusing the Image
286
Solutions When the Image Brightness or Colors are Incorrect
If the projected image is too dark or light, or the colors are incorrect, try the following solutions:
• Press the Color Mode button on the remote control to try different color modes for the image and
environment.
• Check your video source settings.
• Adjust the available settings on the Image menu for the current input source, such as Brightness,
Contrast, Tint, Color Adjustment, and/or Color Saturation.
• Make sure you selected the correct Input Signal or Video Signal setting on the Signal menu, if
available for your image source.
• Make sure all the cables are securely connected to the projector and your video device. If you
connected long cables, try connecting shorter cables.
• If you are using the ECO Power Consumption setting, try selecting Normal in the projector's menus.
• Position the projector close enough to the screen.
• If the image has been progressively darkening, you may need to replace the projector lamp soon.
Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems
Related references
Image Quality Settings - Image Menu
Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu
Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu
Related topics
Connecting to Computer Sources
Connecting to Video Sources
Solutions to Sound Problems
If there is no sound when you expect it or the volume is too low or high, try the following solutions:
• Adjust the projector's volume settings.
• Press the A/V Mute button on the remote control to resume video and audio if they were temporarily
stopped.
• Press the Source Search button to switch to the correct input source, if necessary.
• Check your computer or video source to make sure the volume is turned up and the audio output is set
for the correct source.
287
• Check the audio cable connections between the projector and your video source.
• If you do not hear sound from an HDMI source, set the connected device to PCM output.
• Make sure any connected audio cables are labeled "No Resistance".
• If you are using the USB Display function, turn on the Output audio from the projector setting in the
Epson USB Display Settings program on your computer.
• If you are using a Mac and you do not hear sound from an HDMI source, make sure your Mac
supports audio through the HDMI port. If not, you need to connect an audio cable.
• If you want to use a connected audio source when the projector is off, set the Standby Mode option to
Communication On and the A/V Output option to Always On.
• If you want to use a connected audio source when the projector is off, set the Standby Mode option to
A/V Standby.
• If you turn the projector on immediately after turning it off, the cooling fans may run at high speed
momentarily and cause an unexpected noise. This is normal.
Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu
Related tasks
Shutting Off the Picture and Sound Temporarily
Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems
Check the solutions in these sections if you have problems operating the projector or remote control.
Solutions to Projector Power or Shut-Off Problems
Solutions to Problems with the Remote Control
Solutions to Password Problems
Solutions When the Source Cannot Be Changed
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Solutions to Projector Power or Shut-Off Problems
If the projector does not come on when you press the power button or it shuts off unexpectedly, try the
following solutions:
• Make sure the power cord is securely connected to the projector and to a working electrical outlet.
288
• The projector's buttons may be locked for security. Unlock the buttons or use the remote control to
turn on the projector.
• The power cord may be defective. Disconnect the cord and contact Epson.
• If the projector's lamp shuts off unexpectedly, it may have entered standby mode after a period of
inactivity. Press the power button to wake the projector.
• If the projector's lamp shuts off and the power and Temp lights are red, the projector has overheated
and shut off. Check the solutions for this light status.
• If the power button on the remote control does not turn on the projector, check its batteries and make
sure the Remote Receiver setting is turned on in the projector's menu, if available.
Parent topic: Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems
Related references
Projector Light Status
Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu
Related tasks
Unlocking the Projector's Buttons
Solutions to Problems with the Remote Control
If the projector does not respond to remote control commands, try the following solutions:
• Check that the remote control batteries are installed correctly and have power. If necessary, replace
the batteries.
• Make sure you are operating the remote control within the reception angle and range of the projector.
• Make sure the projector is not warming up or shutting down.
• Check to see if a button on the remote control is stuck down, causing it to enter sleep mode. Release
the button to wake the remote control up.
• Strong fluorescent lighting, direct sunlight, or infrared device signals may be interfering with the
projector's remote receivers. Dim the lights or move the projector away from the sun or interfering
equipment.
• If available, turn off one of the remote receivers in the projector's menu system, or check if all the
remote receivers were turned off.
• If you assigned an ID number to the remote control to operate multiple projectors, you may need to
check or change the ID setting (feature not available with all projectors).
• If you lose the remote control, you can order another one from Epson.
289
Parent topic: Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems
Related references
Remote Control Operation
Related tasks
Replacing the Remote Control Batteries
Solutions to Password Problems
If you cannot enter or remember a password, try the following solutions:
• You may have turned on password protection without first setting a password. Try entering 0000 using
the remote control.
• If you have entered an incorrect password too many times and see a message displaying a request
code, write down the code and contact Epson. Do not attempt to enter the password again. Provide
the request code and proof of ownership for assistance in unlocking the projector.
• If you lose the remote control you cannot enter a password. Order a new one from Epson.
Parent topic: Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems
Related concepts
Projector Security Features
Solutions When the Source Cannot Be Changed
If you are having trouble changing the source, make sure the projector is not opening an image,
scanning, saving, or printing at the same time. Close all projector menus and dialogs. These processes
may take time to complete, and the source cannot be changed during processing.
Parent topic: Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems
Solving Interactive Problems
Check the solutions in these sections if you have problems using the interactive system.
Solutions When "Error Occurred in the Easy Interactive Function" Message Appears
Solutions When the Interactive Pens Do Not Work
Solutions When the Interactive Pen Position Is Not Accurate
Solutions When Manual Calibration Does Not Work
Solutions When the Interactive Pens Are Slow or Difficult to Use
Solutions When the Interactive Pens Cause Interference or Unwanted Effects
290
Solutions When Finger Touch Interactivity Does Not Work
Solutions for Problems With Capturing, Printing, Saving, or Scanning
Solutions When Inking Does Not Appear in Microsoft Office
Solutions When the Pen Does Not Work Over a Network or the Toolbars Do Not Appear
Solutions When the Time Is Incorrect in Whiteboard Settings
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Solutions When "Error Occurred in the Easy Interactive Function" Message Appears
If the "Error occurred in the Easy Interactive Function" message appears, contact Epson for help.
Parent topic: Solving Interactive Problems
Solutions When the Interactive Pens Do Not Work
If the interactive pens do not work, try the following solutions:
• The pens turn off automatically if you forget to turn them off. Tap the pen tip or press the
power/function button to turn the pen back on.
• Make sure you are not covering the black section near the tip of the pen.
• Make sure nothing is blocking the signal between the pen and the interactive pen receiver on the
projector.
• Try holding the pen at a different angle so that your hand is not blocking the signal.
• Make sure the cable cover is in place to keep cables from blocking the signal.
• Make sure the pen battery has enough power. Try replacing the battery.
• If you are projecting from a computer, make sure the USB cable is connected to the computer and
projector.
• Dim the room lights and turn off any fluorescent lights. Make sure the projection surface and pen
receiver are not in direct sunlight or other sources of bright lighting.
• Remove any decorative lights from around the projector or projection surface.
• If the pen tip is worn out or damaged, you may need to replace it.
• Make sure the interactive pen receiver on the projector is clean and free from dust.
• Make sure there is no interference from infrared remote controls, mice, or infrared microphones.
• Make sure the USB Type B option on the Extended menu is set to Easy Interactive Function or USB
Display/Easy Interactive Function.
291
• Make sure you have calibrated the system. Try recalibrating.
• If you are projecting from a laptop computer, make sure the battery has enough power, or connect the
laptop to a power outlet.
• Make sure the Pen Mode and Pen Operation Mode settings are set correctly in the Easy Interactive
Function options on the Extended menu.
• If you are using multiple projectors in the same room, change the Distance of Projectors setting in
Easy Interactive Function > Advanced on the Extended menu.
Parent topic: Solving Interactive Problems
Related tasks
Replacing the Interactive Pen Tips
Replacing the Interactive Pen Batteries
Solutions When the Interactive Pen Position Is Not Accurate
If the pen position is not the same as the mouse pointer, try the following solutions:
• Make sure you have calibrated the system. Try manual calibration.
• Make sure the cable cover is in place to keep cables from blocking the signal.
• Try adjusting the pen operation area.
• If you use the E-Zoom + button on the remote control to enlarge the image, the pen position is not
accurate. When you return the image to the original size, the position should be correct.
• In PC Interactive mode (in the Extended > Advanced menu), turn off Auto Adjust Pen Area and
select Manual Adj. Pen Area.
• Try changing the computer's resolution to 1280 × 800.
Parent topic: Solving Interactive Problems
Related concepts
Pen Calibration
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Related tasks
Adjusting the Pen Operation Area
Zooming Into and Out of Images
Removing and Attaching the Cable Cover
292
Solutions When Manual Calibration Does Not Work
If you are having trouble calibrating manually, try the following solutions:
• If the circle does not move to the next position, or it moves automatically, dim or turn off any bright
lights near the projection surface.
• Make sure the projector is not too close to the projection surface.
Parent topic: Solving Interactive Problems
Solutions When the Interactive Pens Are Slow or Difficult to Use
If the pens are difficult to use or respond too slowly, try the following solutions:
• For easier operation, hold the pen perpendicular to the projection surface.
• For the best performance, connect your computer to the projector using a VGA or HDMI cable for
display and the USB cable for interactivity.
• If you are using a computer, try setting your computer's display to 1280 × 800.
• If you are using USB Display in Windows, you may need to disable Windows Aero in the Epson USB
Display Settings program on your computer.
• If you are projecting over a network, see the EasyMP Network Projection Operation Guide for
performance adjustment instructions.
Parent topic: Solving Interactive Problems
Related tasks
Using the Pens
Solutions When the Interactive Pens Cause Interference or Unwanted Effects
If the pens are causing interference or unwanted effects, try the following solutions:
• When both pens are used at the same time, make sure they are approximately 4 inches (10.16 cm)
apart.
• Turn off the pens when they are not in use.
• Do not rest the pens on the image area of an interactive table, to avoid interference with your
computer's mouse.
• Try changing the Number of Pen Users setting from One User to Two Users. (BrightLink Pro
1420Wi)
• Turn off hovering.
293
Parent topic: Solving Interactive Problems
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Solutions When Finger Touch Interactivity Does Not Work
If finger touch interactivity does not work (BrightLink Pro 1430Wi), try the following solutions:
• Make sure the Touch Unit is installed correctly and the power cable is properly connected. See your
mount's Installation Guide for details.
• If the light on the Touch Unit is not on, check the Touch Unit Setup settings in the Easy Interactive
Function option on the Extended menu and make sure the Power setting is set to On.
• Adjust the angle on the Touch Unit.
• Make sure there are no obstacles (such as cables or pen trays) between the Touch Unit's laser
diffusion ports and the projection surface.
• Remove any decorative lights from around the projector or projection surface.
• Make sure there is no interference from infrared remote controls, mice, or infrared microphones.
• Make sure you have performed pen calibration and finger touch calibration. Try recalibrating.
Parent topic: Solving Interactive Problems
Related concepts
Pen Calibration
Related tasks
Adjusting the Angle of the Touch Unit
Calibrating for Finger Touch Interactivity
Solutions for Problems With Capturing, Printing, Saving, or Scanning
If you are having trouble capturing and pasting, or printing, saving, or scanning, try the following
solutions:
• If you start a process using one of the pens, you must complete it using the pen. If you start using the
remote control or control pad, you must complete the process using the remote control or control pad.
• If you are having trouble pasting a captured image, make sure the image is not protected.
• If a black frame appears around a pasted image, it may be because the image was shifted or resized.
• If you are having trouble printing or scanning, make sure the printer is not out of ink, jammed, or in any
other error state.
294
• For USB printing or scanning, make sure a USB cable is connected between the projector's USB-A
port and the USB-B port on the control pad. Make sure another USB cable is connected between the
Printer port on the control pad and the printer itself.
• For USB printing or scanning, try connecting a different USB cable, and make sure the cables are less
than 16 ft (4.9 m) long.
• Connect only one printer or multifunction device at a time, and make sure the device is supported by
the projector.
• Check the Whiteboard Settings on the Extended menu.
Parent topic: Solving Interactive Problems
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Supported Printer Types
Related tasks
Connecting a Printer to the Control Pad
Solutions When Inking Does Not Appear in Microsoft Office
If Start Inking does not appear on the Review tab in your Microsoft Office application, try this solution.
Open the projector's Extended menu and change the following settings in Easy Interactive Function:
BrightLink Pro 1420Wi:
• Set the Number of Pen Users to One User.
• Set the Pen Operation Mode to Pen.
BrightLink Pro 1430Wi:
Change the Pen Operation Mode setting.
Parent topic: Solving Interactive Problems
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
295
Solutions When the Pen Does Not Work Over a Network or the Toolbars Do Not Appear
If you are having trouble using the pen with a network connection, or the toolbars do not appear on your
projected image, try the following solutions:
• If you are using EasyMP Network Projection software, select Options, then make sure Use
Interactive Pen is enabled. Also, select the Adjust performance tab and select Transfer layered
window.
• If you are using the Quick Wireless Connection USB Key, start the Epson Quick Wireless Connections
Settings program on your computer, select the General settings tab, then make sure Use Interactive
Pen is enabled. Also, select the Adjust performance tab and select Transfer layered window.
Parent topic: Solving Interactive Problems
Solutions When the Time Is Incorrect in Whiteboard Settings
If the time is incorrect on internal storage settings for whiteboard mode, you may need to update the
Time/Schedule Settings on the Extended menu.
Parent topic: Solving Interactive Problems
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
Solving Network Problems
Check the solutions in these sections if you have problems using the projector on a network.
Solutions When Wireless Authentication Fails
Solutions When You Cannot Access the Projector Through the Web
Solutions When Network Alert E-Mails are Not Received
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Solutions When Wireless Authentication Fails
• If the wireless settings are correct, but authentication fails, you may need to update the
Time/Schedule Settings on the Extended menu.
• Check the Security settings and passphrase in the Network Configuration menu.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
296
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu
Solutions When You Cannot Access the Projector Through the Web
If you are unable to access the projector through a web browser, make sure you are using the correct ID
and password, which are case sensitive.
• For the user ID, enter EPSONWEB. (You cannot change the user ID.)
• For the password, enter the password set in the projector's Network menu. The default password is
admin.
• Make sure you have access to the network the projector is on.
Note: The user ID and password are case sensitive.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Related tasks
Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser
Solutions When Network Alert E-Mails are Not Received
If you do not receive an e-mail alerting you to problems with a projector over the network, try the
following solutions:
• Make sure the projector is turned on and connected to the network correctly. (If an error shut down the
projector, it cannot send an e-mail.)
• Make sure you set up the projector e-mail alert settings correctly on the projector's network Mail menu
or in the network software.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Related references
Network Projector E-mail Alert Messages
Related tasks
Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts
Where to Get Help
If you need to contact Epson for technical support services, use the following support options.
297
Internet Support
Visit Epson's support website at epson.com/support (U.S.) or epson.ca/support (Canada) for solutions to
common problems with your projector. You can download utilities and documentation, get FAQs and
troubleshooting advice, or e-mail Epson with your questions.
Speak to a Support Representative
To use the Epson PrivateLine Support service, call (800) 637-7661. This service is available for the
duration of your warranty period. You may also speak with a projector support specialist by dialing (562)
276-4394 (U.S.) or (905) 709-3839 (Canada).
Support hours are 6 AM to 8 PM, Pacific Time, Monday through Friday and 7 AM to 4 PM, Pacific Time,
Saturday.
Days and hours of support are subject to change without notice. Toll or long distance charges may
apply.
Before you call, have the following information ready:
• Product name
• Product serial number (located on the bottom or rear of the projector, or in the menu system)
• Proof of purchase (such as a store receipt) and date of purchase
• Computer or video configuration
• Description of the problem
Purchase Supplies and Accessories
You can purchase screens, other optional accessories, and replacement parts from an Epson authorized
reseller. To find the nearest reseller, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766). Or you can purchase online
at epsonstore.com (U.S. sales) or epson.ca (Canadian sales).
To purchase a replacement remote control, call (562) 276-4394 (U.S.) or (905) 709-3839 (for dealer
referral in Canada).
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Related references
Projector Light Status
298
Technical Specifications
These sections list the technical specifications of your projector.
General Projector Specifications
Projector Lamp Specifications
Remote Control Specifications
Interactive Pen Specifications
Touch Unit Specifications
Projector Dimension Specifications
Projector Electrical Specifications
Projector Environmental Specifications
Projector Safety and Approvals Specifications
Supported Video Display Formats
USB Display System Requirements
General Projector Specifications
Type of display
Poly-silicon TFT active matrix
Resolution
1280 × 800 pixels (WXGA)
Lens
F=1.80
Focal length: 3.71 mm
Color reproduction
Full color, up to 1 billion colors
Brightness
Normal Power Consumption mode:
White light output 3300 lumens (ISO 21118 standard)
Color light output 3300 lumens
ECO Power Consumption mode:
White light output 1900 lumens (ISO 21118 standard)
Note: Color brightness (color light output) and white brightness
(white light output) will vary depending on usage conditions. Color
light output measured in accordance with IDMS 15.4; white light
output measured in accordance with ISO 21118.
299
Contrast ratio
10000:1 with Auto Iris on and Normal Power Consumption mode
Image size
60 inches (1.54 m) to 100 inches (2.54 m)
(in native aspect ratio)
Projection distance
13.7 inches (0.348 m) to 23.5 inches (0.597 m)
(in native aspect ratio)
Projection methods
Front, rear, ceiling-mounted, table projection
Optical aspect ratio
16:10
(width-to-height)
Focus adjustment
Manual
Zoom adjustment
Digital
Zoom ratio
1.0 to 1.35
(Tele-to-Wide)
Internal sound system
16 W monaural
Noise level
35 dB (Normal Power Consumption mode)
28 dB (ECO Power Consumption mode)
Keystone correction angle
Vertical: ± 3°
Horizontal: ± 3°
USB Type B port compatibility One USB 1.1 and 2.0 compliant port for USB display, external
mouse, interactivity
USB Type A port compatibility One USB 1.1 and 2.0 compliant port for USB device input
One USB 1.1 and 2.0 compliant port for Epson document camera
display
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Projector Lamp Specifications
Type
UHE (Ultra High Efficiency)
Power consumption
245 W
300
Lamp life
Normal Power Consumption mode:
Up to about 4000 hours
ECO Power Consumption mode:
Up to about 6000 hours
Note: Turn off this product when not in use to prolong the life of the projector. Lamp life will vary
depending upon mode selected, environmental conditions, and usage. Brightness decreases over time.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Remote Control Specifications
Reception range
19.7 feet (6 m)
Batteries
Two alkaline or manganese AA
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Interactive Pen Specifications
Batteries
One AA alkaline
Size
6.3 inches (161 mm) long; diameter 0.94 inches (24 mm)
Weight
1.06 oz (30 g), excluding the battery
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Touch Unit Specifications
The Touch Unit comes only with the BrightLink Pro 1430Wi.
Technology
Infrared Laser (Class 1)
Dimensions
Height: 3.7 inches (95 mm)
Width: 8.2 inches (207 mm)
Depth: 2 inches (51 mm)
Weight
15.9 oz (450 g)
301
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Projector Dimension Specifications
Height (excluding feet)
6.1 inches (155 mm)
Width
14.4 inches (367 mm)
Depth
14.8 inches (375 mm)
Weight
12.3 lb (5.6 kg)
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Projector Electrical Specifications
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
Power supply
100 to 240 VAC ±10%
3.8 to 1.7 A
Power consumption
Operating:
(100 to 120 V)
Normal Power Consumption mode: 384 W
ECO Power Consumption mode: 288 W
Standby:
0.31 W (Communication Off), 2.4 W (Communication On)
Power consumption
Operating:
(220 to 240 V)
Normal Power Consumption mode: 365 W
ECO Power Consumption mode: 274 W
Standby:
0.42 W (Communication Off), 2.5 W (Communication On)
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
302
Projector Environmental Specifications
Temperature
Operating:
Up to 4921 feet (1500 m): 41 to 95 °F (5 to 35 °C)
4921 feet (1500 m) to 9843 feet (3000 m) : 41 to 86 °F (5 to 30 °C)
Storage: 14 to 140 °F (–10 to 60 °C)
Humidity (relative, noncondensing)
Operating altitude
Operating: 20 to 80%
Storage: 10 to 90%
Up to 4921 feet (1500 m)
Up to 9843 feet (3000 m) with High Altitude Mode enabled
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Projector Safety and Approvals Specifications
United States
FCC Part 15 Class B (DoC)
UL60950-1 2nd edition (cTUVus Mark)
Canada
ICES-003 Class B
CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Supported Video Display Formats
For best results, your computer's monitor port or video card resolution should be set to display in the
projector's native resolution. However, your projector includes Epson's SizeWise chip that supports other
computer display resolutions, so your image will be resized to fit automatically.
Your computer's monitor port or video card refresh rate (vertical frequency) must be compatible with the
projector. (See your computer or video card manual for details.)
The table here lists the compatible refresh rate and resolution for each compatible video display format.
Display format
Refresh rate (in Hz)
Computer signals (analog RGB)
303
Resolution (in pixels)
Display format
Refresh rate (in Hz)
Resolution (in pixels)
VGA
60/72/75/85
640 × 480
SVGA
56/60/72/75/85
800 × 600
XGA
60/70/75/85
1024 × 768
WXGA
60
1280 × 768
60
1366 × 768
60/75/85
1280 × 800
WXGA+
60/75/85
1440 × 900
WXGA++
60
1600 × 900
SXGA
70/75/85
1152 × 864
60/75/85
1280 × 1024
60/75/85
1280 × 960
SXGA+
60/75
1400 × 1050
WSXGA+*
60
1680 × 1050
UXGA
60
1600 × 1200
MAC13"
67
640 × 480
MAC16"
75
832 × 624
MAC19"
75
1024 × 768
59
1024 × 768
75
1152 × 870
TV (NTSC)
60
720 × 480
TV (SECAM)
50
720 × 576
TV (PAL)
50/60
720 × 576
SDTV (480i)
60
720 × 480
SDTV (576i)
50
720 × 576
MAC21"
Composite video
Component video
304
Display format
Refresh rate (in Hz)
Resolution (in pixels)
SDTV (480p)
60
720 × 480
SDTV (576p)
50
720 × 576
HDTV (720p)
50/60
1280 × 720
HDTV (1080i)
50/60
1920 × 1080
VGA
60
640 × 480
SVGA
60
800 × 600
XGA
60
1024 × 768
WXGA
60
1280 × 800
60
1366 × 768
WXGA+
60
1440 × 900
WXGA++
60
1600 × 900
WSXGA+
60
1680 × 1050
SXGA
60
1280 × 960
60
1280 × 1024
SXGA+
60
1400 × 1050
UXGA
60
1600 × 1200
SDTV (480i/480p)
60
720 × 480
SDTV (576i/576p)
50
720 × 576
HDTV (720p)
50/60
1280 × 720
HDTV (1080i)
50/60
1920 × 1080
HDTV (1080p)
24/30/50/60
1920 × 1080
VGA
60
640 × 480
SDTV (480i/480p)
60
720 × 480
SDTV (576i/576p)
50
720 × 576
HDMI input signals
MHL input signals
305
Display format
Refresh rate (in Hz)
Resolution (in pixels)
HDTV (720p)
50/60
1280 × 720
HDTV (1080i)
50/60
1920 × 1080
HDTV (1080p)
24/30
1920 × 1080
* Wide resolution only
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
USB Display System Requirements
Your computer system must meet the system requirements here to use the projector's USB Display
software.
Requirement
Windows
Mac
Operating system
Windows XP Professional, Home
Edition, and Tablet PC Edition (32-bit)
OS X 10.5.x (32-bit), and 10.6.x,
10.7.x , 10.8.x, 10.9.x (32- and 64bit)
Windows Vista Ultimate, Enterprise,
Business, Home Premium, and Home
Basic (32-bit)
Windows 7 Ultimate, Enterprise,
Professional, and Home Premium (32and 64-bit); Home Basic and Starter (32bit)
Windows 8.x, Pro, and Enterprise (32and 64-bit)
USB version
USB 1.1 and above (USB 2.0 recommended)
CPU
Mobile Pentium III 1.2 GHz or faster
(1.6 GHz or faster recommended)
Power PC G4 1 GHz or faster (Core
Duo 1.83 GHz or faster
recommended)
Memory
256MB or more (512MB or more
recommended)
512MB or more
Hard disk space
20MB or more
Display
Resolution between 640 × 480 and 1600 × 1200, 16-bit color or greater
306
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Related references
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
307
Notices
Check these sections for important notices about your projector.
Recycling
Important Safety Information
Important Safety Instructions
FCC Compliance Statement
Wireless Telegraphy Act Regulations
Trademarks
Open Source Software License
Copyright Notice
Recycling
Epson offers a recycling program for end of life products. Please go to epson.com/recycle for information
on how to return your products for proper disposal.
Parent topic: Notices
Important Safety Information
Caution: Never look into the projector lens when the lamp is turned on; the bright light can damage your
eyes. Never let children look into the lens when it is on. Never open any cover on the projector, except
the lamp and filter covers. Dangerous electrical voltages inside the projector can severely injure you.
Except as specifically explained in this User's Guide, do not attempt to service this product yourself.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Warning: The projector and its accessories come packaged in plastic bags. Keep plastic bags away
from small children to avoid any risk of suffocation.
Caution: When you replace the lamp, never touch the new lamp with your bare hands; the invisible
residue left by the oil on your hands may shorten the lamp life. Use a cloth or glove to handle the new
lamp.
Parent topic: Notices
308
Important Safety Instructions
Follow these safety instructions when setting up and using the projector:
• Do not look into the lens when the projector is on. The bright light can damage your eyes. Avoid
standing in front of the projector so the bright light does not shine into your eyes.
• Do not place the projector on an unstable cart, stand, or table.
• Do not operate the projector on its side, or while tilted to one side. Do not tilt the projector more than 3°
forward or back.
• If the projector is mounted on a ceiling or wall, it should be installed by qualified technicians using
mounting hardware designed for use with this projector.
• When installing or adjusting a ceiling or wall mount, do not use adhesives to prevent the screws from
loosening and do not use oils or lubricants. This may cause the projector case to crack and the
projector to fall from its ceiling mount. This could cause serious injury to anyone under the mount and
could damage the projector.
• Do not use the projector near water, sources of heat, high-voltage electrical wires, or sources of
magnetic fields.
• Use the type of power source indicated on the projector. Use of a different power source may result in
fire or electric shock. If you are not sure of the power available, consult your dealer or power company.
• Place the projector near a wall outlet where the plug can be easily unplugged.
• Take the following precautions when handling the plug: Do not hold the plug with wet hands. Do not
insert the plug into a dusty outlet. Insert the plug firmly into the outlet. Do not pull the power cord when
disconnecting the plug; always be sure to hold the plug when disconnecting it. Do not overload wall
outlets, extension cords, or power strips. Failure to comply with these precautions could result in fire or
electric shock.
• Do not place the projector where the cord can be walked on. This may result in fraying or damage to
the plug.
• Unplug the projector from the wall outlet before cleaning. Use a dry cloth (or, for stubborn dirt or
stains, a moist cloth that has been wrung dry) for cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners, any
sprays containing flammable gas, or solvents such as alcohol, paint thinner, or benzine.
• Do not block the slots and openings in the projector case. They provide ventilation and prevent the
projector from overheating. Do not operate the projector on a sofa, rug, or other soft surface, or set it
on top of loose papers. Do not cover the projector with a blanket, curtain, or tablecloth. If you are
setting up the projector near a wall, leave at least 7.9 inches (20 cm) of space between the wall and
the air exhaust vent.
• Do not operate the projector in a closed-in cabinet unless proper ventilation is provided.
309
• Never allow objects of any kind to enter any openings in the projector. Do not leave objects, especially
flammable objects, near the projector. Never spill liquid of any kind into the projector.
• If you are using two or more projectors side-by-side, leave at least 2 feet (60 cm) of space between the
projectors to allow for proper ventilation.
• You may need to clean the air filter and vent. A clogged air filter or vent can block ventilation needed
to cool the projector. Do not use canned air, or the gases may leave a residue.
• Do not store the projector outdoors for an extended length of time.
• Except as specifically explained in this manual, do not attempt to service this product yourself. Refer
all servicing to qualified personnel. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous
voltages and other hazards.
• Never open any covers on the projector except as specifically explained in this manual. Never attempt
to disassemble or modify the projector. Refer all repairs to qualified service personnel.
• Unplug the projector from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the
following conditions: if it does not operate normally when you follow the operating instructions, or
exhibits a distinct change in performance; if smoke, strange odors, or strange noises come from the
projector; if the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed; if liquid or foreign objects get inside the
projector, or if it has been exposed to rain or water; if it has been dropped or the housing has been
damaged.
• Do not touch the plug during an electrical storm. Otherwise, you may receive an electric shock.
• Unplug the projector when it will not be used for extended periods.
• Do not use the projector where it may be exposed to rain, water, or excessive humidity.
• Do not use or store the projector where it may be exposed to smoke, steam, corrosive gases,
excessive dust, vibration, or shock.
• Do not use the projector where flammable or explosive gases may be present.
• Do not use or store the projector or remote control in a hot location, such as near a heater, in direct
sunlight, or in a closed vehicle.
• If you use the projector in a country other than where you purchased it, use the correct power cord for
that country.
• Do not stand on the projector or place heavy objects on it.
• Do not use the projector outside of the required temperature range of 41 to 95 °F (5 to 35 °C) at an
altitude of 4921 feet (1500 m) or less, or 41 to 86 °F (5 to 30 °C) at a higher altitude. Doing so may
cause an unstable display and could lead to projector damage. Do not use or store the projector where
it may be exposed to sudden changes in temperature.
310
• Do not store the projector outside of the required temperature range of 14 to 140 °F (–10 to 60 °C) or
in direct sunlight for long periods of time. Doing so may cause damage to the case.
• Do not place anything that can become warped or damaged by heat near the exhaust vents. Do not
bring your hands or face close to the vents while projection is in progress. Do not bring your face close
to the projector while it is in use.
• Before you move the projector, make sure its power is turned off, the plug is disconnected from the
outlet, and all cables are disconnected.
• Never try to remove the lamp immediately after use because it will be extremely hot. Before removing
the lamp, turn off the power and wait at least an hour to allow the lamp to cool completely.
• Do not disassemble the lamp or subject it to impacts.
• Do not place the source of an open flame, such as a lit candle, on or near the projector.
• Do not block the lens during projection using a book or any other object. This could damage the
projector or cause a fire.
• Do not modify the power cord. Do not place heavy objects on top of the power cord or bend, twist, or
pull it excessively. Keep the power cord away from hot electrical appliances.
• If the lamp breaks, ventilate the room to prevent gases contained in the lamp from being inhaled or
coming in contact with your eyes or mouth. If you do inhale gases or gases come in contact with your
eyes or mouth, seek medical advice immediately.
• If the projector is mounted overhead and the lamp breaks, be careful to prevent pieces of glass from
falling into your eyes or mouth when you open the lamp cover. If pieces of glass do get into your eyes
or mouth, seek medical advise immediately.
• Always lower the volume before turning off the projector. Turning on the projector with the volume too
high can damage your ears.
• Do not store the interactive pens or the batteries in a hot location, such as near a heater, in direct
sunlight, or in a closed vehicle.
• Remove the batteries from the interactive pens if you will not be using the pens for a long time.
Note:
The lamp(s) in this product contain mercury. Please consult your state and local regulations
regarding disposal or recycling. Do not put in the trash.
WARNING: The cords included with this product contain chemicals, including lead, known to the State of
California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. (This notice is
provided in accordance with Proposition 65 in Cal. Health & Safety Code § 25249.5 and following.)
Restriction of Use
311
Parent topic: Notices
Restriction of Use
When this product is used for applications requiring high reliability/safety such as transportation devices
related to aviation, rail, marine, automotive; disaster prevention devices; various safety devices; or
functional/precision devices, you should use this product only after giving consideration to including failsafes and redundancies into your design to maintain safety and total system reliability.
Because this product was not intended for use in applications requiring extremely high reliability/safety
such as aerospace equipment, main communication equipment, nuclear power control equipment, or
medical equipment related to direct medical care, please make your own judgment on this product's
suitability after a full evaluation.
Parent topic: Important Safety Instructions
FCC Compliance Statement
For United States Users
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in
a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio and television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
WARNING
The connection of a non-shielded equipment interface cable to this equipment will invalidate the FCC
Certification or Declaration of this device and may cause interference levels which exceed the limits
established by the FCC for this equipment. It is the responsibility of the user to obtain and use a shielded
equipment interface cable with this device. If this equipment has more than one interface connector, do
not leave cables connected to unused interfaces. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
312
For Canadian Users
CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B)
Parent topic: Notices
Wireless Telegraphy Act Regulations
The following acts are prohibited by the Wireless Telegraphy Act:
• Modifying and disassembling (including the antenna)
• Removing the label of conformance
Parent topic: Notices
Trademarks
EPSON®, EasyMP®, Instant Off®, and Quick Corner® are registered trademarks, and EPSON Exceed
Your Vision is a registered logomark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
PrivateLine® is a registered trademark; SizeWiseTM is a trademark; and Epson StoreSM and Extra CareSM
are service marks of Epson America, Inc.
Mac and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
HDMI and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are the trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective owners. Epson disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Parent topic: Notices
Open Source Software License
GNU GPL
This projector product includes the open source software programs which apply the GNU General Public
License Version 2 or later version ("GPL Programs").
313
We provide the source code of the GPL Programs until five (5) years after the discontinuation of same
model of this projector product.
If you desire to receive the source code of the GPL Programs, contact Epson as described in the User's
Guide .
These GPL Programs are WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
The list of GPL Programs is as follows and the names of author are described in the source code of the
GPL Programs
The list of GPL Programs
busybox-1.13.4
iptables-1.4.4
libgcc1(gcc-4.3.3)
libstdc++-6.0.10
linux-2.6.27
patches
udhcp 0.9.8
uvc rev.219
wireless_tools 29
EPSON original drivers
The GNU General Public License Version 2 is as follows. You also can see the GNU General Public
License Version 2 at http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document,
but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change
free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to
most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
314
using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public
License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the
software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask
you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute
copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source
code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which
gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that
there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on,
we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by
others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program
proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free
use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright
holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program",
below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the
Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a
portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter,
translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are
outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is
covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made
by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
315
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any
medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the
absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with
the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2.You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on
the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above,
provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the
date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived
from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the
terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when
started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement
including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you
provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the
user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not
normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an
announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on
the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for
other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by
you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works
based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a
work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other
work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the
following:
316
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no
more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of
the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source
code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the
program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an
executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the
executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that
is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and
so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place,
then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of
the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object
code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under
this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or
rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain
in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else
grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program
(or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its
terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program
subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients'
exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
this License.
317
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason
(not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of
this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License
and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all.
For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those
who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this
License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or
to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the
free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have
made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on
consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to
distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add
an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted
only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public
License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ
in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and
conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the
Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published
by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions
are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.
Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free
software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
318
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR
THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL
ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE
THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE
OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR
DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES
OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH
HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best
way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these
terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each
source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
"copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.
Copyright (C) year, name of author
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
(at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without
even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See
the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not,
write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301
USA.
319
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY
NO WARRANTY; for details type 'show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
under certain conditions; type 'show c' for details.
The hypothetical commands 'show w' and 'show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General
Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than 'show w' and
'show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a
"copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program 'Gnomovision' (which makes
passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If
your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary
applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License
instead of this License.
GNU LGPL
This projector product includes the open source software programs which apply the GNU Lesser
General Public License Version 2 or later version ("LGPL Programs").
We provide the source code of the LGPL Programs until five (5) years after the discontinuation of same
model of this projector product.
If you desire to receive the source code of the LGPL Programs, please contact Epson as described in
the User's Guide.
These LGPL Programs are WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
The list of LGPL Programs is as follows and the names of author are described in the source code of the
LGPL Programs.
LGPL Programs
glibc-2.8
SDL-1.2.13
320
SDL-Image
cairo-1.10.2
podofo-0.91
wcecompat-1.2
The GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 is as follows. You also can see the GNU Lesser
General Public License Version 2 at http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document,
but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library
Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software
packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it.
You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary
General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations
below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and
charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can
change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can
do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to
ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the
321
recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and
recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this
license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library.
Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they
have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems
that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make
sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive
license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the
library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License.
This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite
different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to
permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of
the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General
Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The
Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's
freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less
of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the
ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in
certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a
certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be
allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used
non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we
use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of
people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in nonfree programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant,
the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that
the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that
program using a modified version of the Library.
322
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to
the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former
contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to
run.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice
placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of
this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked
with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these
terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright
law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications
and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without
limitation in the term "modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a
library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are
outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a
program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of
the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the
program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it,
in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the
absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on
the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above,
provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the
date of any change.
323
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms
of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application
program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you
must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or
table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined
independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function
or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root
function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on
the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for
other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by
you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works
based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work
based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work
under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to
a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that
they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer
version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify
that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General
Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a
library.
4.You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code
or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the
complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.
324
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering
equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute
the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object
code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the
Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in
isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative
of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The
executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such
executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object
code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether
this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a
library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small
macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is
unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object
code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under
the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not
they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library"
with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms
of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and
reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the
Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work
during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among
them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of
these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library
including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2
above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable
"work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library
and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that
325
the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to
recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that
(1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than
copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the
library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version
that the work was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the
materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this
distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent
access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this
user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility
programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials
to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form)
with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the
executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that
do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both
them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library
together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library,
provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is
otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with
any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the
Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided
under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library
is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have
received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as
such parties remain in full compliance.
326
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else
grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or
any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms
and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to
these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of
the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this
License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason
(not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of
this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License
and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For
example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who
receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this
License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or
to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the
free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have
made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on
consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to
distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add
an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted
only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General
Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but
may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
327
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and
conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the
Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the
Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions
are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted
by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make
exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all
derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR
THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL
ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE
THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE
OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA
BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH
HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we
recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by
permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General
Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of
each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.
328
Copyright (C) year, name of author
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser
General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License,
or (at your option) any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even
the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if
not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301
USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a
"copyright disclaimer" for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library 'Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs)
written by James Random Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
That's all there is to it!
BSD License (Berkeley Software Distribution License)
This projector product includes the open source software program "University of California, Berkeley
License (Berkeley Software Distribution License)" which applies the terms and conditions provided by
owner of the copyright to the "BSD License".
The "BSD License" are WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
List of BSD License programs
busybox-1.13.4
License terms of conditions of each program which are provided by owner of the copyright to the "BSD
License" are as follows.
Copyright (c) The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Kenneth Almquist.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
329
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
libjpeg
This projector product includes the open source software program "libjpeg" which applies the terms and
conditions provided by owner of the copyright to the "libjpeg".
The "libjpeg" are WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
List of libjpeg programs
libjpeg-6b
License terms of conditions of each program which are provided by owner of the copyright to the
"libjpeg" are as follows.
Copyright (C) 1994-1997, Thomas G. Lane. This file is part of the Independent JPEG Group's software.
For conditions of distribution and use, see the accompanying README file.
This distribution contains the sixth public release of the Independent JPEG Group's free JPEG software.
You are welcome to redistribute this software and to use it for any purpose, subject to the conditions
under LEGAL ISSUES, below.
LEGAL ISSUES
============
In plain English:
1. We don't promise that this software works. (But if you find any bugs, please let us know!)
330
2. You can use this software for whatever you want. You don't have to pay us.
3. You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it in a program, you must acknowledge
somewhere in your documentation that you've used the IJG code.
In legalese:
The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either express or implied, with respect to this
software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose. This software is
provided "AS IS", and you, its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality and accuracy.
This software is copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane. All Rights Reserved except as specified
below.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software (or portions thereof) for
any purpose, without fee, subject to these conditions:
(1) If any part of the source code for this software is distributed, then this README file must be included,
with this copyright and no-warranty notice unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes to the
original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation.
(2) If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying documentation must state that "this
software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group".
(3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts full responsibility for any
undesirable consequences; the authors accept NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind.
These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the IJG code, not just to the unmodified
library. If you use our work, you ought to acknowledge us.
Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author's name or company name in advertising or
publicity relating to this software or products derived from it. This software may be referred to only as
"the Independent JPEG Group's software".
We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of commercial products,
provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product vendor.
ansi2knr.c is included in this distribution by permission of L. Peter Deutsch, sole proprietor of its
copyright holder, Aladdin Enterprises of Menlo Park, CA. ansi2knr.c is NOT covered by the above
copyright and conditions, but instead by the usual distribution terms of the Free Software Foundation;
principally, that you must include source code if you redistribute it. (See the file ansi2knr.c for full details.)
However, since ansi2knr.c is not needed as part of any program generated from the IJG code, this does
not limit you more than the foregoing paragraphs do.
The Unix configuration script "configure" was produced with GNU Autoconf. It is copyright by the Free
Software Foundation but is freely distributable. The same holds for its supporting scripts (config.guess,
config.sub, ltconfig, ltmain.sh). Another support script, install-sh, is copyright by M.I.T. but is also freely
distributable.
331
It appears that the arithmetic coding option of the JPEG spec is covered by patents owned by IBM, ATT,
and Mitsubishi. Hence arithmetic coding cannot legally be used without obtaining one or more licenses.
For this reason, support for arithmetic coding has been removed from the free JPEG software. (Since
arithmetic coding provides only a marginal gain over the unpatented Huffman mode, it is unlikely that
very many implementations will support it.) So far as we are aware, there are no patent restrictions on
the remaining code.
The IJG distribution formerly included code to read and write GIF files. To avoid entanglement with the
Unisys LZW patent, GIF reading support has been removed altogether, and the GIF writer has been
simplified to produce "uncompressed GIFs". This technique does not use the LZW algorithm; the
resulting GIF files are larger than usual, but are readable by all standard GIF decoders.
We are required to state that "The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of
CompuServe Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of CompuServe Incorporated."
libpng
This projector product includes the open source software program "libpng" which applies the terms and
conditions provided by owner of the copyright to the "libpng".
The "libpng" are WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
List of libpng programs
libpng-1.2.49
License terms of conditions of each program which are provided by owner of the copyright to the "libpng"
are as follows.
For conditions of distribution and use, see copyright notice in png.h Copyright (c) 1998-2012 Glenn
Randers-Pehrson (Version 0.96 Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger) (Version 0.88 Copyright (c)
1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.)
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your convenience. In case of any discrepancy between
this copy and the notices in the file png.h that is included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall prevail.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE:
If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this sentence.
This code is released under the libpng license.
libpng version 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.2.49, March 29, 2012, are Copyright (c) 2004, 20062009 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as
libpng-1.2.5 with the following individual added to the list of Contributing Authors
Cosmin Truta
332
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 - October 3, 2002, are Copyright (c) 2000-2002 Glenn
Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with
the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Eric S. Raymond
Gilles Vollant
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement.
There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This
library is provided with all faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and
effort is with the user.
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn
Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with
the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors:
Tom Lane
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger
Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the following individuals
added to the list of Contributing Authors:
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
Magnus Holmgren
Greg Roelofs
Tom Tanner
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric
Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.
For the purposes of this copyright and license, "Contributing Authors" is defined as the following set of
individuals:
Andreas Dilger
Dave Martindale
333
Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all
warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of
fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct,
indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the
PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this source code, or portions hereof, for
any purpose, without fee, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented.
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the
original source.
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and encourage the use of
this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use
this source code in a product, acknowledgment is not required but would be appreciated.
A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for convenient use in "about" boxes and the like:
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and "pngbar.jpg"
(88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31).
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark of the
Open Source Initiative.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
glennrp@users.sourceforge.net
March 29, 2012
zlib
This projector product includes the open source software program "zlib" which applies the terms and
conditions provided by owner of the copyright to the "zlib".
The "zlib" are WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
List of zlib programs
334
zlib-1.1.4
zlib-1.2.3
minzip 1.01e
License terms of conditions of each program which are provided by owner of the copyright to the "zlib"
are as follows.
Copyright notice:
(C) 1995-1998 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be
held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications,
and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original
software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would
be appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being
the original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly
jloup@gzip.org
Mark Adler
madler@alumni.caltech.edu
If you use the zlib library in a product, we would appreciate *not* receiving lengthy legal documents to
sign. The sources are provided for free but without warranty of any kind. The library has been entirely
written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; it does not include third-party code.
If you redistribute modified sources, we would appreciate that you include in the file ChangeLog history
information documenting your changes.
Apache License
This projector product includes the open source software program which applies the following license
terms "Apache License Version 2.0, January 2004".
List of "Apache License Programs"
mDNSResponder-107.6 (only mDNSResponderPosix is used)
335
Google Web Toolkit
GWT-Crypto 2.3.0
get-file-api
GWT-Log
DroidSansFallback
License terms "Apache License Version 2.0, January 2004" are as follows.
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by
Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the
License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled
by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i)
the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or
otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial
ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to
software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source
form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to
other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the
License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is
provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived
from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications
represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works
336
shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of,
the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any
modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to
Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to
submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form
of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but
not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking
systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving
the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing
by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution
has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor
hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform,
sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby
grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as
stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise
transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor
that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with
the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity
(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution
incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent
licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is
filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in
any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the
following conditions:
(a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
(b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
(c) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent,
trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not
pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
(d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You
distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file,
337
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the
following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source
form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the
Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE
file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution
notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text
from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the
License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different
license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such
Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise
complies with the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally
submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this
License, without any additional terms or conditions.
Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license
agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service
marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in
describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides
the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation,
any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or
redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this
License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence),
contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts)
or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect,
special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of
the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work
stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if
such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof,
You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other
liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations,
You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other
338
Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any
liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such
warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields
enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!)
The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend
that a file or class name and description of purpose be included on the same "printed page" as the
copyright notice for easier identification within third-party archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License");
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is
distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.
newlib
This projector product includes the open source software program "newlib" which applies the terms and
conditions provided by owner of the copyright to the "newlib".
The "newlib" are WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
List of newlib programs
newlib 1.17.0
License terms of conditions of each program which are provided by owner of the copyright to the "newlib"
are as follows.
The newlib subdirectory is a collection of software from several sources.
Each file may have its own copyright/license that is embedded in the source file. Unless otherwise noted
in the body of the source file(s), the following copyright notices will apply to the contents of the newlib
subdirectory:
339
(1) Red Hat Incorporated
Copyright (c) 1994-2007 Red Hat, Inc. All rights reserved.
This copyrighted material is made available to anyone wishing to use, modify, copy, or redistribute it
subject to the terms and conditions of the BSD License. This program is distributed in the hope that it will
be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY expressed or implied, including the implied warranties of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. A copy of this license is available
at http://www.opensource.org/licenses. Any Red Hat trademarks that are incorporated in the source
code or documentation are not subject to the BSD License and may only be used or replicated with the
express permission of Red Hat, Inc.
(2) University of California, Berkeley
Copyright (c) 1981-2000 The Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
*
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
*
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
*
Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(3) David M. Gay (ATT 1991, Lucent 1998)
340
The author of this software is David M. Gay.
Copyright (c) 1991 by ATT.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose without fee is hereby
granted, provided that this entire notice is included in all copies of any software which is or includes a
copy or modification of this software and in all copies of the supporting documentation for such software.
THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY. IN PARTICULAR, NEITHER THE AUTHOR NOR ATT MAKES ANY REPRESENTATION
OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND CONCERNING THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THIS SOFTWARE OR
ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
----------The author of this software is David M. Gay.
Copyright (C) 1998-2001 by Lucent Technologies
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both
that the copyright notice and this permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name of Lucent or any of its entities not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission.
LUCENT DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL LUCENT OR
ANY OF ITS ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
(4) Advanced Micro Devices
Copyright 1989, 1990 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
This software is the property of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc (AMD) which specifically grants the user
the right to modify, use and distribute this software provided this notice is not removed or altered. All
other rights are reserved by AMD.
AMD MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH REGARD TO THIS
SOFTWARE. IN NO EVENT SHALL AMD BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING FROM THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE, OR
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
341
So that all may benefit from your experience, please report any problems or suggestions about this
software to the 29K Technical Support Center at 800-29-29-AMD (800-292-9263) in the USA, or 080089-1131 in the UK, or 0031-11-1129 in Japan, toll free. The direct dial number is 512-462-4118.
Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
29K Support Products
Mail Stop 573
5900 E. Ben White Blvd.
Austin, TX 78741
800-292-9263
(5)
C.W. Sandmann
Copyright (C) 1993 C.W. Sandmann
This file may be freely distributed as long as the author's name remains.
(6) Eric Backus
(C) Copyright 1992 Eric Backus
This software may be used freely so long as this copyright notice is left intact. There is no warrantee on
this software.
(7) Sun Microsystems
Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Developed at SunPro, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. business. Permission to use, copy, modify, and
distribute this software is freely granted, provided that this notice is preserved.
(8) Hewlett Packard
(c) Copyright 1986 HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY
To anyone who acknowledges that this file is provided "AS IS" without any express or implied warranty:
permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this file for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice and this notice appears in all copies, and that the name of
Hewlett-Packard Company not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission. Hewlett-Packard Company makes no representations
about the suitability of this software for any purpose.
(9) Hans-Peter Nilsson
Copyright (C) 2001 Hans-Peter Nilsson
342
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software is freely granted, provided that the above
copyright notice, this notice and the following disclaimer are preserved with no changes.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
(11) Christopher G. Demetriou
Copyright (c) 2001 Christopher G. Demetriou
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(12) SuperH, Inc.
Copyright 2002 SuperH, Inc. All rights reserved
This software is the property of SuperH, Inc (SuperH) which specifically grants the user the right to
modify, use and distribute this software provided this notice is not removed or altered. All other rights are
reserved by SuperH.
SUPERH MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH REGARD TO THIS
SOFTWARE. IN NO EVENT SHALL SUPERH BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING FROM THE FURNISHING,
PERFORMANCE, OR USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
343
So that all may benefit from your experience, please report any problems
or suggestions about this software to the SuperH Support Center via
e-mail at softwaresupport@superh.com .
SuperH, Inc.
405 River Oaks Parkway
San Jose
CA 95134
USA
(13) Royal Institute of Technology
Copyright (c) 1999 Kungliga Tekniska Hšskolan (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden).
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of KTH nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY KTH AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL KTH OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(14) Alexey Zelkin
Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 Alexey Zelkin phantom@FreeBSD.org
All rights reserved.
344
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(15) Andrey A. Chernov
Copyright (C) 1997 by Andrey A. Chernov, Moscow, Russia.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(16) FreeBSD
345
Copyright (c) 1997-2002 FreeBSD Project.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(17) S. L. Moshier
Author: S. L. Moshier.
Copyright (c) 1984,2000 S.L. Moshier
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose without fee is hereby
granted, provided that this entire notice is included in all copies of any software which is or includes a
copy or modification of this software and in all copies of the supporting documentation for such software.
THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY. IN PARTICULAR, THE AUTHOR MAKES NO REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND CONCERNING THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR
ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
(18) Citrus Project
Copyright (c)1999 Citrus Project,
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
346
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(19) Todd C. Miller
Copyright (c) 1998 Todd C. Miller Todd.Miller@courtesan.com
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
(20) DJ Delorie (i386)
347
Copyright (C) 1991 DJ Delorie
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms is permitted provided that the above copyright notice
and following paragraph are duplicated in all such forms.
This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
(23) Intel (i960)
Copyright (c) 1993 Intel Corporation
Intel hereby grants you permission to copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation.
Intel grants this permission provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both
the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. In addition, Intel
grants this permission provided that you prominently mark as "not part of the original" any modifications
made to this software or documentation, and that the name of Intel Corporation not be used in
advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software or the documentation without specific,
written prior permission.
Intel Corporation provides this AS IS, WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Intel makes no guarantee or representations regarding the use of, or the
results of the use of, the software and documentation in terms of correctness, accuracy, reliability,
currentness, or otherwise; and you rely on the software, documentation and results solely at your own
risk.
IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND. IN
NO EVENT SHALL INTEL'S TOTAL LIABILITY EXCEED THE SUM PAID TO INTEL FOR THE
PRODUCT LICENSED HEREUNDER.
(26) Mike Barcroft
Copyright (c) 2001 Mike Barcroft mike@FreeBSD.org
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
348
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(27) Konstantin Chuguev (--enable-newlib-iconv)
Copyright (c) 1999, 2000
Konstantin Chuguev. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
iconv (Charset Conversion Library) v2.0
(28) Artem Bityuckiy (--enable-newlib-iconv)
Copyright (c) 2003, Artem B. Bityuckiy, SoftMine Corporation. Rights transferred to Franklin Electronic
Publishers.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
349
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(30) - Alex Tatmanjants (targets using libc/posix)
Copyright (c) 1995 Alex Tatmanjants alex@elvisti.kiev.ua
at Electronni Visti IA, Kiev, Ukraine.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(31) - M. Warner Losh (targets using libc/posix)
350
Copyright (c) 1998, M. Warner Losh imp@freebsd.org
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(32) - Andrey A. Chernov (targets using libc/posix)
Copyright (C) 1996 by Andrey A. Chernov, Moscow, Russia.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
351
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(33) - Daniel Eischen (targets using libc/posix)
Copyright (c) 2001 Daniel Eischen deischen@FreeBSD.org.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1.Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(35) - ARM Ltd (arm and thumb variant targets only)
Copyright (c) 2009 ARM Ltd
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the company may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ARM LTD "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
352
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL ARM LTD BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(36) - CodeSourcery, Inc.
Copyright (c) 2009 CodeSourcery, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
*
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
*
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
*
Neither the name of CodeSourcery nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY CODESOURCERY, INC. "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AREDISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL CODESOURCERY BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(37) MIPS Technologies, Inc
/*
353
*
Copyright (c) 2009 MIPS Technologies, Inc.
*
*
All rights reserved.
*
*
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
*
*
*
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
*
*
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
*
*
Neither the name of MIPS Technologies Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
*
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
354
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
/*
WPA Supplicant
The copyright owner of the WPA Supplicant open source software provides terms and conditions
(hereinafter referred to as "WPA Supplicant License"). The projector uses this product in compliance
with the BSD License, as part of the WPA Supplicant License.
The "WPA Supplicant License" is WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
List of WPA Supplicant License programs
WPA Supplicant-0.7.3
License terms of conditions of each program which are provided by owner of the copyright to the "WPA
Supplicant License" are as follows.
Copyright (c) 2003-2011, Jouni Malinen j@w1.fi and contributors All Rights Reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name(s) of the above-listed copyright holder(s) nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
For MPEG-4 ASP:
355
With respect to a Licensee offering MPEG-4 Video Decoders and/or Encoders the following notice shall
be given: THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO
LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR (i)
ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD ("MPEG-4 VIDEO")
AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO
PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR
SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT
RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA,LLC. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
For MPEG-4 AVC:
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD ("AVC VIDEO") AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT
WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/ OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO
LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
For WMV/WMA (Microsoft):
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft.
Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from
Microsoft.
For VC-1
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1 PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD ("VC-1 VIDEO") AND/OR (ii)DECODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT
WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO
LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
MIT License
This projector product includes the open source software program which applies the terms and
conditions provided by owner of the copyright to the "MIT License".
The "MIT License" are WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
List of MIT License programs
356
pixman-0.21.6
jquery-1.7.2.min.js
jquery.upload-1.0.2.min.js
License terms of conditions of each program which are provided by owner of the copyright to the "MIT
License" are as follows.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
The following is the MIT license, agreed upon by most contributors. Copyright holders of new code
should use this license statement where possible. They may also add themselves to the list below.
Copyright 1987, 1988, 1989, 1998 The Open Group
Copyright 1987, 1988, 1989 Digital Equipment Corporation
Copyright 1999, 2004, 2008 Keith Packard
Copyright 2000 SuSE, Inc.
Copyright 2000 Keith Packard, member of The XFree86 Project, Inc.
Copyright 2004, 2005, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010 Red Hat, Inc.
Copyright 2004 Nicholas Miell
Copyright 2005 Lars Knoll, Zack Rusin, Trolltech
Copyright 2005 Trolltech AS
Copyright 2007 Luca Barbato
Copyright 2008 Aaron Plattner, NVIDIA Corporation
Copyright 2008 Rodrigo Kumpera
357
Copyright 2008 Andre Tupinambá
Copyright 2008 Mozilla Corporation
Copyright 2008 Frederic Plourde
Copyright 2009 Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Copyright 2009, 2010 Nokia Corporation.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions: he above copyright notice and this permission notice (including the next paragraph)
shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
TOPPERS/JSP
This projector product includes the open source software program "TOPPERS/JSP" which applies the
terms and conditions provided by owner of the copyright to the "TOPPERS/JSP".
The "TOPPERS/JSP" are WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
List of TOPPERS/JSP programs
jsp-1.4.3
License terms of conditions of each program which are provided by owner of the copyright to the "
TOPPERS/JSP " are as follows.
TOPPERS/JSP Kernel
Toyohashi Open Platform for Embedded Real-Time Systems/Just Standard Profile Kernel
Copyright (C) 2000-2003 by Embedded and Real-Time Systems Laboratory Toyohashi Univ. of
Technology, JAPAN
Copyright (C) 2004 by Embedded and Real-Time Systems Laboratory
Graduate School of Information Science, Nagoya Univ., JAPAN.
358
The above copyright holder, limited to cases in which one satisfies conditions (1) ~ (4) below, or the
conditions described in Version 2 of the GNU Public License officially announced by the Free Software
Foundation, consents to the use, reproduction, alteration, and redistribution (hereafter called utilization)
of this software (this software includes alterations, likewise below) without compensation.
(1) When this software is utilized in the form of source code, the above copyright declaration, these
conditions of utilization, and the following stipulation of no guarantee shall be included in unchanged
form inside the source code.
(2) When this software is redistributed in a form in which it can be used in the development of other
software, library form, etc., the above copyright display, these terms of utilization, and the following
stipulation of no guarantee shall be inserted in documentation accompanying redistribution (user's
manual, etc.).
(3) When this software is redistributed in a form in which it cannot be used in the development of other
software, embedded in devices, etc., one of the following conditions shall be satisfied.
(a) The above copyright display, these terms of utilization, and the following stipulation of no guarantee
shall be inserted in documentation accompanying redistribution (user's manual, etc.).
(b) The TOPPERS Project shall be notified owing to a method in which the form of distribution is decided
otherwise.
(4) The above copyright holder and the TOPPERS Project shall be exempt from responsibility for
whatever damages occur either directly or indirectly through the utilization of this software.
This software is something that is provided with no guarantee. The above copyright holder and the
TOPPERS Project make no guarantee whatsoever in regard to this software, including the possibility of
its application. In addition, the above copyright holder and the TOPPERS Project shall also not bear
responsibility for whatever damages occur either directly or indirectly through the utilization of this
software.
Note: The TOPPERS License has been revised several times; what is shown above is the latest version
that is to be applied to software made public hereafter.
TINET
This projector product includes the open source software program "TINET" which applies the terms and
conditions provided by owner of the copyright to the "TINET".
The "TINET" are WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
List of TINET programs
tinet-1.4.4
359
License terms of conditions of each program which are provided by owner of the copyright to the
"TINET" are as follows.
(1) FreeBSD
Copyright (c) 1980, 1986, 1993
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
(6) TINET and TOPPERS
TINET (TCP/IP Protocol Stack)
Copyright (C) 2001-2006 by Dep. of Computer Science and Engineering Tomakomai National College of
Technology, JAPAN
TINET (TCP/IP Protocol Stack)
Copyright (C) 2001-2006 by Dep. of Computer Science and Engineering Tomakomai National College of
Technology, JAPAN
360
The above copyright holder, limited to cases in which one satisfies conditions (1) ~ (4) below, or the
conditions described in Version 2 of the GNU Public License officially announced by the Free Software
Foundation, consents to the use, reproduction, alteration, and redistribution (hereafter called utilization)
of this software (this software includes alterations, likewise below) without compensation.
(1) When this software is utilized in the form of source code, the above copyright declaration, these
conditions of utilization, and the following stipulation of no guarantee shall be included in unchanged
form inside the source code.
(2) When this software is redistributed in a form in which it can be used in the development of other
software, library form, etc., the above copyright display, these terms of utilization, and the following
stipulation of no guarantee shall be inserted in documentation accompanying redistribution (user's
manual, etc.).
(3) When this software is redistributed in a form in which it cannot be used in the development of other
software, embedded in devices, etc., following conditions shall be satisfied.
(a) The above copyright display, these terms of utilization, and the following stipulation of no guarantee
shall be inserted in documentation accompanying redistribution (user's manual, etc.).
(4) The above copyright holder and the TOPPERS Project shall be exempt from responsibility for
whatever damages occur either directly or indirectly through the utilization of this software.
This software is something that is provided with no guarantee. The above copyright holder and the
TOPPERS Project make no guarantee whatsoever in regard to this software, including the possibility of
its application. In addition, the above copyright holder and the TOPPERS Project shall also not bear
responsibility for whatever damages occur either directly or indirectly through the utilization of this
software.
uriparser
This projector product includes the open source software program "uriparser" which applies the terms
and conditions provided by owner of the copyright to the "uriparser".
List of uriparser programs
uriParser 0.7.7
Copyright (c) 2007, Weijia Song songweijia@gmail.com
Copyright (c) 2007, Sebastian Pipping webmaster@hartwork.org
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
361
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the ORGANIZATION nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
libJson
This projector product includes the open source software program "libJson" which applies the terms and
conditions provided by owner of the copyright to the "libJson".
List of libJson programs
Copyright 2010, 2011 Jonathan Wallace. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY JONATHAN WALLACE "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL JONATHAN WALLACE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
362
The views and conclusions contained in the software and documentation are those of the authors and
should not be interpreted as representing official policies, either expressed or implied, of Jonathan
Wallace.
OpenSSL License
This projector product includes the open source software program "OpenSSL" which applies the terms
and conditions provided by owner of the copyright to the "OpenSSL".
List of OpenSSL programs
OpenSSL 1.0.1e
OpenSSL 1.0.1e
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. All
advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment: This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org)
The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please
contact openssl-core@openssl.org
Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their
names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product
includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software
written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
363
SSLeay license
This projector product includes the open source software program "OpenSSL" which applies the terms
and conditions provided by owner of the copyright to the "OpenSSL".
List of OpenSSL programs
OpenSSL 1.0.1e
Copyright (c) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL
implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to
conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the
following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution,
be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with
this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If
this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the
library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online
or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com)". The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used
are not cryptographic related.
If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application
code) you must include an acknowledgment: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
364
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publically
available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied
and put under another distribution licence, including the GNU Public Licence.
Parent topic: Notices
Copyright Notice
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of Seiko Epson Corporation. The information contained herein is
designed only for use with this Epson product. Epson is not responsible for any use of this information as
applied to other products.
Neither Seiko Epson Corporation nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this product or third
parties for damages, losses, costs, or expenses incurred by purchaser or third parties as a result of:
accident, misuse, or abuse of this product or unauthorized modifications, repairs, or alterations to this
product, or (excluding the U.S.) failure to strictly comply with Seiko Epson Corporation's operating and
maintenance instructions.
Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be liable for any damages or problems arising from the use of any
options or any consumable products other than those designated as Original Epson Products or Epson
Approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation.
This information is subject to change without notice.
A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials
Copyright Attribution
Parent topic: Notices
A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials
Epson encourages each user to be responsible and respectful of the copyright laws when using any
Epson product. While some countries' laws permit limited copying or reuse of copyrighted material in
certain circumstances, those circumstances may not be as broad as some people assume. Contact your
legal advisor for any questions regarding copyright law.
Parent topic: Copyright Notice
Copyright Attribution
© 2015 Epson America, Inc.
1/15
365
CPD-41026R2
Parent topic: Copyright Notice
366